{"title":"Hi-Fi Furniture \u0026 TV Furniture","description":"\u003cp\u003eHi-fi and TV furniture is more than just a surface to put things on: racks, boards and wall mounts that hold your devices stably, with low resonance and tidily — and look good in the living room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA well-thought-out piece of furniture keeps vibration away from the electronics, routes cables and heat where they belong, and safely carries whatever sits on it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the right furniture matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA stable, decoupled base keeps structure-borne vibration away from turntable and electronics — audible especially with vinyl and in high-end systems. And a securely mounted TV on wall or board isn't just nicer, it's also safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you'll find here\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHi-fi racks\u003c\/a\u003e for electronics and turntables, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/tv-mobel-boards\"\u003eTV furniture \u0026amp; boards\u003c\/a\u003e for the living room, and matching wall mounts — from Blok, Sonorous and Multibrackets, from purist design to well-thought-out AV solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho it's for — straight talk\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStraight talk:\u003c\/strong\u003e with furniture, the right load capacity and size matter more than looks alone. An undersized rack or an underestimated wall load takes its revenge. Tell us what's going on and next to it, and we'll size it correctly — better right the first time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe right furniture combines stability, tidiness and looks — and with sensitive sources it even brings an audible benefit. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we work out with you what suits your devices, TV and room, and take care of delivery and installation on request.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes good hi-fi furniture make an audible difference?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A stable, decoupled base keeps vibration away from turntable and electronics — audible especially with vinyl and in high-end systems. With purely digital sources the effect is smaller, but tidiness and safety remain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size and load capacity do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat depends on your devices and your TV. Tell us what goes on it — number, weight, dimensions and the wall situation — and we'll size the rack, board or mount accordingly. Better planned right than planned tight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo you install the furniture and the TV wall mount?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, on request. Delivery, assembly and TV wall mounting are handled properly and safely by our technician — including cable routing. So everything ends up stable, tidy and correct.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy hi-fi \u0026amp; TV furniture at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we match the furniture to your devices, your TV and your room — instead of just selling a shelf. Honest advice on load capacity and size, plus delivery and installation by our own technician, at our showroom or at your home on Lake Zurich.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eContinue to \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHi-fi racks\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/tv-mobel-boards\"\u003eTV furniture \u0026amp; boards\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/fernseher\"\u003eTVs\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/entkopplung\"\u003edecoupling solutions\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does good hi-fi furniture make an audible difference?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. A stable, decoupled base keeps vibration away from turntable and electronics — audible especially with vinyl and in high-end systems. With purely digital sources the effect is smaller, but tidiness and safety remain.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What size and load capacity do I need?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"That depends on your devices and your TV. Tell us what goes on it — number, weight, dimensions and the wall situation — and we'll size the rack, board or mount accordingly. Better planned right than planned tight.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Do you install the furniture and the TV wall mount?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, on request. Delivery, assembly and TV wall mounting are handled properly and safely by our technician — including cable routing. So everything ends up stable, tidy and correct.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why buy hi-fi \u0026 TV furniture at HD Zürisee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Because we match the furniture to your devices, your TV and your room — instead of just selling a shelf. Honest advice on load capacity and size, plus delivery and installation by our own technician, at our showroom or at your home on Lake Zurich.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55black4707","title":"Multibrackets 4707 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″, Black","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Black is a motorized TV cabinet that lowers a TV up to 55 inches into its body and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden, handcrafted in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard in deep black that simply looks like a beautiful piece of furniture during the day – and sends the screen up out of hiding in the evening. Technology that submits to your room instead of the other way around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted MDF surface from the Englesson Classic Collection – texture instead of a piano-lacquer foil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eArrives fully assembled: unpack, place, plug in. No Allen-key acrobatics.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix trackless casters are hidden in the base – the 97 kg piece of furniture can be moved and then locked in place.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen front compartment under the display for a soundbar or video bar (Logitech, Poly, Cisco).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAll cables disappear inside the body – away from children, pets, and tripping hazards.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the touch of a button, the TV rises quietly (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). The lid sits magnetically and gives way if something's in the path – no pinched fingers. Anti-collision protection and an overheating cutoff for the motor come as standard. The TV mount takes up to 50 kg and VESA up to 600 × 400 mm. Via the RJ45 connection, you integrate the piece of furniture into an external control system – handy in a meeting room as much as in a smart home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdeal when the TV shouldn't be the constant focal point: in the living room, in the boss's office, or in a meeting room, where a tidy sideboard turns into a conference display on demand. Straight talk: if you leave your TV running all day anyway and have a fixed spot on the wall, you're paying here for a lift you'll never use – then a simple wall mount will do. And nobody carries 97 kg up a staircase casually; think about location and delivery beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn honest piece of furniture with a quiet technical trick – not a gadget that annoys you after a year. If you value a calm living picture and want to see the screen only when you're actually using it, this is a grown-up solution. We're happy to advise you in person in Wädenswil on room, TV match, and delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1350 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 97 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF wireless remote, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in trackless casters (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete piece of furniture (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote control, 6 casters, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. The motor rises at roughly 25 mm per second and stays discreetly in the background – no distraction in a living room or a meeting room. There's no audible hum or rattling parts; the lift is meant to draw attention through what appears, not through its noise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill my soundbar fit into the cabinet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Under the display there's an open front compartment designed for standard soundbars and professional video bars from Logitech, Poly, or Cisco. That way the sound radiates freely while the rest of the electronics disappears into the body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches, a maximum of 50 kg, with a VESA pattern up to 600 × 400 mm. That covers virtually all common 55-inch models. Not sure whether your TV fits? Tell us the model and weight, and we'll check it for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. You unpack it, place it, and plug it in – the lift and mount are already installed. Given the 97 kg, delivery and setup by us is recommended; it's best to sort out stairs and narrow doors beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan the piece of furniture be moved later?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Six trackless casters sit in the base. You roll the sideboard to its new spot and lock it via the recess in the base – handy if a room is ever used differently or the light works better elsewhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause furniture for picture and sound is part of our core business, and we know what matters for integration. We advise you on TV match, room, and wiring, deliver and set up on site, and with Mauri we have our own technician for it. Questions? Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFind complementary \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e for clean cable management directly in the shop – or let us advise you on the whole setup right away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485416784,"sku":null,"price":2990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-4707-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-schwarz-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530363"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55classicwhite5889","title":"Multibrackets 5889 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Classic, White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Classic White is a motorized TV cabinet that lowers a TV up to 55 inches into the body and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden, handcrafted in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard in bright white that lightens up a room rather than dominating it like a black rectangle. Once the film is over, the screen is gone again too.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ in white?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted white MDF surface from the Englesson Classic Collection – sturdy and easy to clean.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eArrives fully assembled: unpack, place, plug in – done.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix trackless casters sit in the base; the 97 kg can be moved and then locked.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen front compartment under the display for a soundbar or video bar (Logitech, Poly, Cisco).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAll cables disappear inside the body – no cable clutter in the bright living picture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the touch of a button, the TV rises quietly (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). The magnetic lid gives way if something's in the path, plus anti-collision protection and an overheating cutoff. The mount takes up to 50 kg at VESA 600 × 400 mm, and via RJ45 the piece of furniture can be integrated into an external control system – in a meeting room just as in a living room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bright, modern rooms where the TV shouldn't constantly dominate – living room, office, meeting room. Straight talk: if you leave the TV running all the time anyway and have a fixed spot on the wall, you don't need a lift; a wall mount will do. And you don't reposition a 97 kg piece of furniture in passing – clarify location and delivery route beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA homely design piece that doesn't let its technical trick show. Especially in white, it feels light despite housing plenty of technology. Which TV fits, how the room plays along, and how delivery works – we'll sort that out with you at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e White\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1350 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 97 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF wireless remote, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in trackless casters (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete piece of furniture (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote control, 6 casters, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. The motor lifts the TV at roughly 25 mm per second and stays discreet – no distraction in a living room or a meeting room. There's no audible hum or rattling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill my soundbar fit into the cabinet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The open front compartment under the display is designed for standard soundbars and video bars from Logitech, Poly, or Cisco. The sound radiates freely while the rest of the electronics stays inside the body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches, a maximum of 50 kg, with VESA up to 600 × 400 mm. That covers virtually all common 55-inch models. If unsure, just tell us your model, and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the white surface easy to maintain?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The hand-painted surface is sturdy and can be cleaned with a slightly damp cloth. It's built for everyday use and stays spotless for a long time with normal care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. Unpack, place, plug in – the lift and mount are already installed. Given the 97 kg, we're happy to handle delivery and setup; it's best to sort out stairs and narrow doors beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause furniture for picture and sound has been part of our everyday business for years, and we think about integration: TV match, room, wiring. We deliver, set up, and have Mauri as our own technician for it. Get in touch – phone, email, or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e for invisible cable management are available directly in the shop – or we plan the setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485449552,"sku":null,"price":2990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-5889-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-classic-weiss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530636"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55slimlineblack","title":"Multibrackets 8033 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline, Black","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline Black is a slim, motorized TV cabinet with a lift that lowers a TV up to 55 inches and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned in Sweden, manufactured in the EU: only 27 cm deep, with identical front and back. It stands freely in a room without an unsightly back side getting in the way – and brings the screen up quietly when you need it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline in black?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOnly 27 cm deep, front and back identical – can be placed freely in a room or as a room divider.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl via wireless remote, optionally through the Tuya app on your phone or by voice command – the app is a bonus, not a requirement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall height adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm – from sideboard height to standing height.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnti-collision protection stops the lift as soon as it meets resistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable with a stand (stationary) or casters (mobile) – both included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lift raises the TV quietly (under 50 dB, 25 mm per second) to the height you want. You control it the classic way via wireless remote – or, if you like, via the Tuya app or voice command. The lift's load capacity is 30 kg, and there's room for a soundbar under the display. With casters, the 80 kg piece of furniture becomes a mobile conference station; with the stand, it stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet Slimline suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdeal for narrow floor space, room-divider situations, and mobile meeting rooms – anywhere a deep sideboard would feel too bulky. Straight talk: watch the maximum load capacity of 30 kg – noticeably less than the massive Classic models. It's worth checking very large, heavy 55-inch TVs with us beforehand. And if you're mounting the TV fixed to the wall anyway, you don't need the lift.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe slim, flexible alternative to a heavy sideboard: little floor space, plenty of freedom of movement, smart control. The more elegant solution for modern, tidy rooms. Whether your TV fits the 30 kg limit and which control makes sense – we'll sort that out at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed in Sweden, manufactured in the EU\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e slim motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 27 cm (front\/back identical)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustment (overall height):\u003c\/strong\u003e 810–2170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight (furniture):\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise level:\u003c\/strong\u003e under 50 dB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e wireless remote, optional Tuya app, voice control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e stand or casters (both included)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e partially pre-assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e furniture incl. lift system, control unit, wireless remote, TV mounting set, stand, casters, power adapter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I control the lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eVia the included wireless remote. If you like, you can additionally use the Tuya app on your smartphone or voice commands. The app is optional – the lift works fine without any account, using just the remote.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow deep is the piece of furniture?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOnly 27 cm. Front and back are designed identically, so you can place it freely in a room or as a room divider without an unsightly back side showing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUp to what height does the lift travel?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe overall height is adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm. That lets you adjust the picture height for sitting or standing – from low living-room level to presentation height in a meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches with a maximum of 30 kg. Load capacity matters more here than on the massive models – tell us the model and weight, and we'll check whether your TV fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt arrives partially pre-assembled; individual steps like the stand or casters and the TV mount you complete yourself when setting it up. We're happy to handle delivery and assembly on request.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet Slimline at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause the control, load capacity, and location need to fit together well – and that's exactly where we advise. We sort out TV match and placement, deliver and assemble on request, with Mauri as our own technician. Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we plan your setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485482320,"sku":null,"price":2990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-8033-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-slimline-schwarz-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530854"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55slimlineblackwalnut","title":"Multibrackets 8057 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline, Black Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline Black Walnut is a slim, motorized TV cabinet with a lift that lowers a TV up to 55 inches and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned in Sweden, manufactured in the EU: only 27 cm deep, in a dark walnut look (Black Walnut), with identical front and back. It brings the warmth of wood into modern rooms – and brings the screen up quietly when you need it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline in Black Walnut?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarm, dark walnut look instead of a cool black box – yet still only 27 cm slim.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFront and back identical – can be placed freely in a room or as a room divider.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl via wireless remote, optionally Tuya app or voice command – the app stays optional.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall height adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm; anti-collision protection stops it at obstacles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWith stand or casters – stationary or as a mobile conference station.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lift raises the TV quietly (under 50 dB, 25 mm per second) to the height you want. You control it the classic way via remote – or, if you like, via the Tuya app or voice commands. The lift load capacity is 30 kg, and there's room for a soundbar under the display. With casters, the 80 kg piece of furniture becomes mobile; on the stand, it stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet Slimline suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modern rooms that can take a bit of warm wood, that have little floor space, or that should stay flexible – living area, lounge, meeting room. Straight talk: lift load capacity stops at 30 kg, clearly under the massive Classic models. So check heavy 55-inch TVs with us beforehand. And if you're mounting the TV fixed to the wall anyway, you don't need the lift.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe warmest of the slim variants: dark wood, slender build, smart control. For anyone who doesn't want to see the technology but wants to feel the wood. Whether your TV fits the 30 kg limit and how you set it up – we'll sort that out at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed in Sweden, manufactured in the EU\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e slim motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, walnut look\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Black Walnut (dark walnut look)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 27 cm (front\/back identical)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustment (overall height):\u003c\/strong\u003e 810–2170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight (furniture):\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise level:\u003c\/strong\u003e under 50 dB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e wireless remote, optional Tuya app, voice control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e stand or casters (both included)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e partially pre-assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e furniture incl. lift system, control unit, wireless remote, TV mounting set, stand, casters, power adapter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I control the lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eVia the included wireless remote. You can additionally use the Tuya app on your smartphone or voice commands. The app is optional – without an account, using just the remote, the lift works just as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow deep is the piece of furniture?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOnly 27 cm. Front and back are designed identically, so you can place it freely in a room or as a room divider without a disruptive back side showing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUp to what height does the lift travel?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe overall height is adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm. That matches the picture height to sitting or standing – from living-room level to presentation height in a meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches with a maximum of 30 kg. Load capacity is more decisive here than on the massive models – tell us the model and weight, and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePartially pre-assembled; the stand or casters and the TV mount you install yourself when setting it up. On request we're happy to take care of delivery and assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet Slimline at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause control, load capacity, and location need to fit together – and that's exactly where we advise. We sort out TV match and placement, deliver and assemble on request, with Mauri as our own technician. Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we plan your setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485515088,"sku":null,"price":2990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-8057-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-slimline-black-walnut-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530434"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55slimlinewhite","title":"Multibrackets 8026 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline, White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline White is a slim, motorized TV cabinet with a lift that lowers a TV up to 55 inches and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned in Sweden, manufactured in the EU: only 27 cm deep, in bright white, with identical front and back. It blends unobtrusively into light-filled rooms – and brings the screen up quietly as soon as you need it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline in white?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOnly 27 cm deep, designed identically on both sides – ideal as a room divider or freely placed in a bright room.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl via wireless remote, optionally Tuya app or voice command – the app is an option, not a must.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall height adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm – matches picture height to sitting or standing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnti-collision protection: the lift stops automatically at obstacles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable with stand or casters – stationary or as a mobile conference station.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lift raises the TV quietly (under 50 dB, 25 mm per second) to the height you want. Control is the classic way via remote – or, if desired, via the Tuya app or voice commands. The lift load capacity is 30 kg, and there's room for a soundbar under the display. On casters, the 80 kg piece of furniture can be easily repositioned; on the stand, it stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet Slimline suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bright, modern rooms with little floor space, room-divider situations, and flexible meeting rooms. Straight talk: the lift load capacity stops at 30 kg – noticeably less than the massive Classic furniture. So check heavy 55-inch TVs with us beforehand. And if you screw the TV fixed to the wall and leave it there, you don't need a lift.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBright, slim, flexible: the homely slimline variant for light-filled rooms where a deep sideboard would be too much. Smart control included. Whether your TV fits the 30 kg limit and which setup makes sense – we'll sort that out at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed in Sweden, manufactured in the EU\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e slim motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e White\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 27 cm (front\/back identical)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustment (overall height):\u003c\/strong\u003e 810–2170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight (furniture):\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise level:\u003c\/strong\u003e under 50 dB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e wireless remote, optional Tuya app, voice control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e stand or casters (both included)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e partially pre-assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e furniture incl. lift system, control unit, wireless remote, TV mounting set, stand, casters, power adapter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I control the lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eVia the included wireless remote. Optionally, you can add the Tuya app on your smartphone or voice commands. The app is voluntary – without an account, using just the remote, the lift works just as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow deep is the piece of furniture?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOnly 27 cm. Since front and back are identical, you can place it freely in a room or as a room divider without a disruptive back side showing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUp to what height does the lift travel?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe overall height can be set from 810 to 2170 mm. That matches the picture height to sitting or standing – from living-room level to presentation height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches with a maximum of 30 kg. Load capacity matters more here than on the massive models – tell us the model and weight, and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePartially pre-assembled; you install the stand or casters and the TV mount yourself when setting it up. On request we're happy to handle delivery and assembly for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet Slimline at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause control, load capacity, and location need to fit together – and that's exactly where our advice starts. We sort out TV match and placement, deliver and assemble on request, with Mauri as our own technician. Get in touch – phone, email, or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we align on the whole setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485547856,"sku":null,"price":2990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-8026-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-slimline-weiss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530677"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55slimlinewhitewalnut","title":"Multibrackets 8040 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline, White Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline White Walnut is a slim, motorized TV cabinet with a lift that lowers a TV up to 55 inches and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned in Sweden, manufactured in the EU: only 27 cm deep, in a bright look with warm walnut accents (White Walnut) and identical front and back. It stays understated in a bright room – and brings the screen up quietly when you need it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Slimline in White Walnut?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBright surface with walnut accents – light and homely at once, while staying only 27 cm deep.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFront and back identical – can be placed freely in a room or as a room divider.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl via wireless remote, optionally Tuya app or voice command – the app stays optional.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall height adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm; anti-collision protection stops it at obstacles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWith stand or casters – stationary or as a mobile conference station.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lift raises the TV quietly (under 50 dB, 25 mm per second) to the height you want. You control it the classic way via remote – or, if you like, via the Tuya app or voice commands. The lift load capacity is 30 kg, and there's room for a soundbar under the display. With casters, the 80 kg piece of furniture becomes mobile; on the stand, it stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet Slimline suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bright, modern rooms that can take a touch of wood, that have little floor space, or the wish for flexibility – living area, lounge, meeting room. Straight talk: lift load capacity stops at 30 kg, clearly under the massive Classic models. So check heavy 55-inch TVs with us beforehand. And if you're mounting the TV fixed to the wall anyway, you don't need the lift.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBright with a warm accent: the friendliest of the slim variants, without giving up smart control and flexible placement. For light-filled rooms that can take a bit of wood. Whether your TV fits the 30 kg limit and how you set it up – we'll sort that out at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed in Sweden, manufactured in the EU\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e slim motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, walnut accents\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e White Walnut (bright surface with walnut accents)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 27 cm (front\/back identical)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustment (overall height):\u003c\/strong\u003e 810–2170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight (furniture):\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise level:\u003c\/strong\u003e under 50 dB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLift speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e wireless remote, optional Tuya app, voice control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e stand or casters (both included)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e partially pre-assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e furniture incl. lift system, control unit, wireless remote, TV mounting set, stand, casters, power adapter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I control the lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eVia the included wireless remote. You can additionally use the Tuya app on your smartphone or voice commands. The app is optional – without an account, using just the remote, the lift works just as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow deep is the piece of furniture?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOnly 27 cm. Front and back are designed identically, so you can place it freely in a room or as a room divider without a disruptive back side showing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUp to what height does the lift travel?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe overall height is adjustable from 810 to 2170 mm. That matches the picture height to sitting or standing – from living-room level to presentation height in a meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches with a maximum of 30 kg. Load capacity is more decisive here than on the massive models – tell us the model and weight, and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePartially pre-assembled; the stand or casters and the TV mount you install yourself when setting it up. On request we're happy to take care of delivery and assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet Slimline at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause control, load capacity, and location need to fit together – and that's exactly where we advise. We sort out TV match and placement, deliver and assemble on request, with Mauri as our own technician. Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we plan your setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485613392,"sku":null,"price":2990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-8040-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-slimline-white-walnut-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530933"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55walnut5896","title":"Multibrackets 5896 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″, Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ Walnut is a motorized TV cabinet that lowers a TV up to 55 inches into the body and raises it again at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden, handcrafted in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard in a warm walnut look with classic details. It looks like a fine piece of living-room furniture – and lets a 55-inch screen appear from it on demand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ in walnut?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted surface in a walnut look, Englesson Classic Collection – warm and homely rather than technical and cold.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBehind three doors lies real storage with adjustable shelves, plus room for the soundbar.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eArrives fully assembled – unpack, place, plug in.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix trackless casters in the base: move and lock the nearly 100 kg piece of furniture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRJ45 connection and removable back-panel sections for clean cable management.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the touch of a button, the TV rises quietly (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). The lid sits magnetically and gives way if something's in the path; add anti-collision protection and an overheating cutoff that briefly pauses the motor under continuous load. The mount takes up to 50 kg (VESA 600 × 400 mm). The RJ45 connection handles integration with external control systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor classically or warmly furnished rooms where a black display would look out of place – living room, study, a representative office. Straight talk: if you just want to hang a TV on the wall and leave it running all the time anyway, you need neither the lift nor the storage. And the roughly 97 kg belongs on a load-bearing floor, not spontaneously carried up a spiral staircase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe most homely model in the range: the walnut look turns the tech hideout into a full-fledged piece of furniture with storage. If you want character instead of high gloss, this is it. Which TV fits and how delivery works – we'll sort that out with you at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Walnut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1350 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 97 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF wireless remote, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 doors, 2 adjustable shelves, soundbar compartment, removable back-panel sections\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in trackless casters (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete piece of furniture (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote control, 6 casters, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. The motor lifts the TV at roughly 25 mm per second and stays discreetly in the background – no distraction in a living room or an office. There's no rattling or loud humming.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much storage does the piece of furniture offer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBehind three doors you'll find compartments with two adjustable shelves plus a dedicated compartment for the soundbar. AV equipment, remotes, and accessories disappear cleanly into the body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnits up to 55 inches, a maximum of 50 kg, VESA up to 600 × 400 mm. That covers virtually all common 55-inch models. If in doubt, we'll check the fit based on your model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. Unpack, place, plug in – the lift is already installed. Given the nearly 100 kg, we'll deliver and set it up on request; it's best to sort out stairs and narrow doors beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I access the inside for cabling?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The back panel is divided into sections that can be unscrewed. That gives you comfortable access to cables and connections without dismantling the whole piece of furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause furniture for picture and sound is part of our core business, and we think through the integration: TV match, room, wiring, placement. Mauri, our own technician, is on hand for this. Get in touch – phone, email, or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we plan your setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485646160,"sku":null,"price":2999.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-5896-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-walnuss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530338"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift55white4684","title":"Multibrackets 4684 AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″, White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ White is a motorized TV cabinet that makes a TV up to 55 inches disappear into the body and brings it back out at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden and handcrafted in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard in clear white. Switched on, it's a 55-inch display; switched off, it's a calm piece of furniture again – not a black hole on the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 55″ in white?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted white surface (MDF), Englesson Classic Collection – bright, with tangible texture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDelivered fully assembled – no instructions, no tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix trackless casters in the base: move the 97 kg, then lock it in place.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen front compartment for a soundbar or video bar (Logitech, Poly, Cisco).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing entirely on the inside – nothing lies around visibly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia wireless remote, the TV rises quietly out of the body (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). A magnetic lid, anti-collision protection, and an overheating cutoff make sure nothing jams or overheats. The mount takes up to 50 kg (VESA 600 × 400 mm), and the RJ45 connection integrates the piece of furniture into an external control system when needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to keep their living or work space tidy and only wants to see the screen when it's needed. Straight talk: if your TV is fixed to the wall anyway and running constantly, the lift is money wasted – a mount will do. And 97 kg isn't a weight you carry up a floor on a whim; check the delivery route beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA bright design that doesn't put its technology on display – that's exactly the appeal. If you want a living room or meeting room without a dominant black rectangle, this is the right choice. We're happy to advise you in person at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil on room, TV match, and delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e White\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1350 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 97 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 55 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF wireless remote, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in trackless casters (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete piece of furniture (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote control, 6 casters, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. The travel runs at roughly 25 mm per second and stays in the background – no distraction in a living room or a meeting. There's no rattling or a noticeable motor hum.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill my soundbar fit into the cabinet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Under the display there's an open front compartment for standard soundbars and video bars (Logitech, Poly, Cisco). That way the sound radiates freely while the rest of the electronics stays hidden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUp to 55 inches, a maximum of 50 kg, VESA up to 600 × 400 mm – that fits practically any common 55-inch unit. If in doubt, send us your model and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the piece of furniture delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. You just need to unpack it, place it, and plug it in. Given the 97 kg, we deliver and place it on request; it's best to discuss stairs and narrow doors beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan the piece of furniture be moved later?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Six trackless casters sit in the base – you roll the sideboard to its new spot and lock it via the recess. Handy if a room is ever used differently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause picture and sound belong together, and we think about both from one source: the right TV, wiring, placement. As a specialist store with our own technician (Mauri), we're with you from advice through to installation. Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with this\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse the other \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi and TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and grab the matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e right away – or we align on the whole setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485678928,"sku":null,"price":2999.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-4684-av-cabinet-tv-lift-55-zoll-weiss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530645"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift65black4714","title":"Multibrackets 4714 AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″, Black","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″ Black is a motorized TV cabinet that lowers a TV up to 65 inches into its body and raises it again at the push of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden, handmade in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard in deep black, 1.65 m wide. Big enough for a 65-incher – and still a piece of furniture that doesn't overwhelm the room once the screen has disappeared.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″ in Black?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted black MDF surface from the Englesson Classic Collection – with a tangible texture instead of cheap high gloss.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHolds TVs up to 65 inches and arrives fully assembled.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix untraceable castors in the base: move the 110 kg, then lock it in place.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen front compartment for a soundbar or video bar (Logitech, Poly, Cisco).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComplete cable management inside – nothing lies around in view.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get out of it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the push of a button, the large screen rises quietly (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). A magnetic lid, anti-collision protection and an overheating cutoff ensure safe operation. The mount carries up to 50 kg (VESA 600 × 400 mm), and the RJ45 connection integrates the cabinet into professional control systems – ideal for larger meeting and living spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor larger rooms that can take a 65-inch appearance but don't want to see it all the time – living room, lounge, meeting room. Straight talk: a small room has no business with either a 65-incher or a 1.65 m wide sideboard. And 110 kg is no small ask – a load-bearing floor and a well-thought-out delivery route are mandatory, not a detail.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe big, understated solution: plenty of screen, little visual noise. If you want a home cinema or a representative conference room with a 65-inch display without the device dominating the space, this delivers exactly that. We'll advise you on TV match, room and delivery at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour:\u003c\/strong\u003e Black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1650 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 110 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 65 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF remote control, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e Anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open front compartment for soundbar\/video bar, removable rear panel sections\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in, untraceable castors (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete cabinet (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote, 6 castors, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. Despite the larger screen, the motor lifts at around 25 mm per second and stays discreetly in the background. There's no noticeable humming or rattling – even in the 65-inch format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill my soundbar fit in the cabinet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Below the display there's an open front compartment for standard soundbars and video bars (Logitech, Poly, Cisco). The sound radiates freely while the rest of the tech stays inside the body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDevices up to 65 inches, maximum 50 kg, VESA up to 600 × 400 mm. With large diagonals it's worth checking the weight – tell us your model and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the cabinet delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. You unpack it, set it in place and plug it in. At 110 kg we recommend delivery and setup by us; stairs, lifts and narrow doors are best clarified beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan the cabinet be moved later on?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Six untraceable castors in the base make the heavy cabinet movable; on site you lock it via the recess. That keeps the room flexible to use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause large displays and heavy furniture need planning – and that's exactly our trade. We advise on TV match, room and cabling, deliver and set up on site, with Mauri as our own technician. Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi \u0026 TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we can plan the whole setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485711696,"sku":null,"price":3340.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-4714-av-cabinet-tv-lift-65-zoll-schwarz-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786530935"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift65walnut7487","title":"Multibrackets 7487 AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″, Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″ Walnut is a motorized TV cabinet that lowers a TV up to 65 inches into its body and raises it again at the push of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden, handmade in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard with a warm walnut look, 1.65 m wide. By day a homely piece of furniture with storage space, at the push of a button the stage for your big screen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″ in Walnut?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted walnut look from the Englesson Classic Collection – warm and high-quality, not a technology box.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoom for TVs up to 65 inches, plus storage behind three doors and a soundbar compartment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eArrives fully assembled – unpack, place, plug in.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix untraceable castors in the base: move the 103 kg and lock it in place.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRJ45 connection and removable rear panel sections for clean cable management.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get out of it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the push of a button, the 65-incher rises quietly from the body (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). The magnetic lid gives way under resistance, while anti-collision protection and an overheating cutoff protect the motor and its surroundings. The mount carries up to 50 kg (VESA 600 × 400 mm), and RJ45 handles the link to external control systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor larger, homely or classically furnished rooms where a large black display would be out of place – living room, lounge, representative office. Straight talk: for a small room the cabinet is too imposing, and if you leave the TV running permanently anyway, you don't need the lift. At 103 kg: a load-bearing floor and a well-thought-out delivery route are assumed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe heavyweight of the range in its most homely variant: big picture, warm wood, plenty of storage. If you want character over high gloss and a 65-incher without a constant presence, this is the one. We'll clarify TV match, room and delivery with you at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour:\u003c\/strong\u003e Walnut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1650 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 103 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 65 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF remote control, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e Anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 doors, storage space, soundbar compartment, removable rear panel sections\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in, untraceable castors (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete cabinet (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote, 6 castors, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. Even in the 65-inch format, the motor lifts at around 25 mm per second and stays discreetly in the background. There's no audible humming or rattling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much storage does the cabinet offer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBehind three doors there's usable storage space plus its own compartment for the soundbar. AV devices, sources and cables disappear neatly inside the body instead of standing around in the open.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDevices up to 65 inches, maximum 50 kg, VESA up to 600 × 400 mm. Especially with large diagonals it's worth checking the weight – tell us your model and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the cabinet delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. Unpack, place, plug in – the lift is already built in. At 103 kg we're happy to handle delivery and setup; stairs and narrow doors are best clarified beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I access the inside for cabling?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The rear panel is divided into sections that unscrew. That gives you comfortable access to cables and connections without dismantling the cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause furniture for picture and sound is our core business, and large, heavy pieces need planning. We advise on TV match, room and cabling, deliver and set up, with Mauri as our own technician. Get in touch – phone, email or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi \u0026 TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we can plan your setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485744464,"sku":null,"price":3340.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-7487-av-cabinet-tv-lift-65-zoll-walnuss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786531153"},{"product_id":"avcabinettvlift65white4691","title":"Multibrackets 4691 AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″, White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Multibrackets AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″ White is a motorized TV cabinet that lowers a TV up to 65 inches into its body and raises it again at the push of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Englesson in Sweden, handmade in Europe: a hand-painted sideboard in bright white, 1.65 m wide. A large-format piece that looks light thanks to its bright surface – and makes the 65-incher disappear the moment it isn't needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the AV Cabinet TV Lift 65″ in White?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand-painted white MDF surface, Englesson Classic Collection – bright, with a tangible texture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTakes TVs up to 65 inches and is delivered fully assembled.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix untraceable castors in the base: move the 110 kg and lock it in place.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen front compartment for a soundbar or video bar (Logitech, Poly, Cisco).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing entirely inside, removable rear panel sections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get out of it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the push of a button, the large screen rises quietly (900 mm travel, 25 mm per second). Under continuous load the motor takes a short pause thanks to the overheating cutoff; a magnetic lid and anti-collision protection ensure safe operation. The mount carries up to 50 kg (VESA 600 × 400 mm), and via RJ45 you integrate the cabinet into external control systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the AV Cabinet suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor larger, bright rooms with space for a 65-incher that shouldn't be constantly present – open-plan living spaces, lounges, conference rooms. Straight talk: a small room simply doesn't fit the 1.65 m wide cabinet, and without a wish for a retractable TV, the lift is superfluous. 110 kg needs a load-bearing floor and a planned delivery route.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBig screen, bright elegance, little visual ballast – the airiest way to house a 65-incher. If you have an open-plan living concept or a modern meeting room, this works well for you. We'll advise you on TV match, room and delivery at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand \/ design:\u003c\/strong\u003e Multibrackets, designed by Englesson Sweden (Classic Collection)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Motorized TV cabinet with lift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e MDF, hand-painted surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour:\u003c\/strong\u003e White\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1650 × 977 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 110 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen size (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 65 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTV load capacity (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVESA (max.):\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 900 mm, electric, 25 mm\/second\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl:\u003c\/strong\u003e RF remote control, RJ45 for external source control\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e Anti-collision protection, overheating protection, magnetic lid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open front compartment for soundbar\/video bar, removable rear panel sections\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobility:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 built-in, untraceable castors (lockable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery condition:\u003c\/strong\u003e fully assembled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e complete cabinet (assembled), pre-installed lift, RF remote, 6 castors, magnetic lid with mounting plate, instruction manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow loud is the TV lift?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eQuiet. Even the large screen rises discreetly at around 25 mm per second. There's no noticeable humming or rattling – the cabinet is meant to stand out through what appears, not through noise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill my soundbar fit in the cabinet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Below the display there's an open front compartment for standard soundbars and video bars (Logitech, Poly, Cisco). The sound radiates freely while the rest of the tech stays hidden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich TV fits on it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDevices up to 65 inches, maximum 50 kg, VESA up to 600 × 400 mm. With large diagonals the weight is decisive – tell us your model and we'll check the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the cabinet delivered assembled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, fully assembled. Unpack, place, plug in. At 110 kg we recommend delivery and setup by us; stairs, lifts and narrow doors are best clarified beforehand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan the cabinet be moved later on?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Six untraceable castors in the base make the heavy cabinet movable; it's locked via the recess in the base. That keeps the room flexible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the AV Cabinet at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause a 65-incher in a cabinet isn't a given – fit, room and delivery route need planning, and that's exactly our business. We advise, deliver and set up, with Mauri as our own technician. Call or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi \u0026 TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e and matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available directly in the shop – or we can plan the setup together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Multibrackets","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989485777232,"sku":null,"price":3340.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/multibrackets-4691-av-cabinet-tv-lift-65-zoll-weiss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786531421"},{"product_id":"blokstax2g3escheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf HiFi Rack, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf is a modular HiFi rack with three levels that carries your components on decoupled shelves and can be stacked with further modules at any time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish combines black-stained ash with natural walnut – a calm material mix that takes in dark electronics without the furniture taking over the room. The Stax 2G series is built by Blok in the UK, a brand of the Monitor Audio Group.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Stax 2G 3-Shelf?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 3-Shelf configuration consists of the base module and two Module 170s – three shelves for amplifier, source, and turntable. Each level is bolted together with four M10 bolts, and the tool for this is included. If your system grows, you simply insert another module in between instead of replacing the whole rack. A rack you expand instead of throwing away – that's rarer than it should be.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAbove all, a calm, solid stance. Between the levels sits a silicone isolation layer that slows down structure-borne vibration before it reaches the cartridge. The side supports are hollow and can be filled with sand through lockable openings – more mass, less resonance. The four feet are height-adjustable and can be fitted with spikes or hard-floor pads, so the rack doesn't wobble even on an old, uneven parquet floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stax 2G 3-Shelf suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to set up a manageable chain of amplifier, source, and turntable cleanly – and cares that the furniture doesn't look like a server cabinet while doing it. Straight talk: if you need to fit six devices plus a record collection, the 4-Shelf version or additional modules serve you better. And a rack doesn't fix a difficult room – it only takes the vibrations off your gear that a living-room floor would otherwise happily pass on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA piece of HiFi furniture you can put on display instead of hiding, and one that's technically capable of more than its understated looks suggest. The Stax 2G series won the EISA \"AV Furniture 2024-2025\" Award. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we go through the module heights with you beforehand, so your amplifier doesn't end up fighting for millimetres.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Modular HiFi rack, 3 levels (base module + 2× Module 170)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Shelves ash plywood black, side supports walnut natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 475 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable surface per level (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height per level: 170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation layer between levels, side supports fillable with sand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 14.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: base module, 2× Module 170, feet ×4, M10 bolts ×4, bolt caps ×4, Blok assembly tool, height adjustment tool, quick guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow big is the Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the plywood finish, the rack measures 602 mm wide, 475 mm high, and 402 mm deep. Each of the two added levels offers 170 mm usable height and 480 × 379 mm of surface. The height-adjustable feet compensate for small unevenness as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much weight does a level carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach level is rated for up to 40 kg. That covers heavy integrated amplifiers, power amps, or solid turntables without issue. Put the heaviest device at the bottom, distribute the rest sensibly, and make sure the floor is level – then the structure stays permanently rigid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I expand the rack later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Stax 2G is a building-block system: you undo the M10 fixings, insert an additional Module 120, 170, 220, or LP in between, and screw it back together. That turns the 3-Shelf into a 4-Shelf without having to replace the whole piece of furniture. The modules are available in the same finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to fill the side supports with sand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, that's optional. The supports are hollow and can be filled through lockable openings, which adds mass and further dampens resonance. The rack also works perfectly well without filling – filling it is fine-tuning, not a mandatory step in assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we tell you in advance which module heights suit your devices and what your floor needs under the spikes – instead of leaving you alone with the configurator. Our specialist team in Wädenswil delivers, sets up on request, and tidies the system in properly. Call us: 044 680 22 00.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYour chain goes on the levels: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e benefit most clearly from the calm stance, and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e suit it well too. You'll find everything about the groove under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alles-vinyl\"\u003eAll Vinyl\u003c\/a\u003e, and the selection under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003eCables \u0026amp; Connectors\u003c\/a\u003e keeps things tidy behind the rack.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989490954576,"sku":null,"price":950.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-3-shelf-hifi-rack-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442865"},{"product_id":"blokstax2g3eschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf HiFi Rack, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf is a modular HiFi rack with three levels whose shelves sit decoupled on a silicone isolation layer and which can be expanded module by module.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHere, natural ash meets silky-matte satin white – light, airy, and understated enough that the system doesn't look out of place in a living room. The series is developed and built by Blok in the UK, a brand of the Monitor Audio Group.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Stax 2G 3-Shelf?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou get the base module plus two Module 170s, making three shelves with 170 mm of usable height each – enough for an integrated amplifier, a streamer, and a turntable. Assembly takes a quarter of an hour, the tool is included, and when another device joins later, you slide in another module. No new purchase, no furniture-store box with eighty-seven loose parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA foundation that doesn't pass vibrations on. The silicone isolation layer between the levels decouples each shelf from the one below, and the hollow side supports can be filled with sand, making them noticeably deader. Four height-adjustable feet with spikes or hard-floor pads bring the rack level on carpet as on parquet – no need for the famous folded piece of cardboard under the fourth foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stax 2G 3-Shelf suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bright, modern living rooms and systems of three to four devices where the furniture should deliberately stay quiet. Straight talk: satin white shows dust more readily than dark surfaces, and if you're stacking a large record collection, plan an LP module in from the start. As a mere shelf, the Stax 2G is overqualified – its strength is decoupling, not square footage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe most unassuming of the three finishes, and that's exactly where its appeal lies: it carries the technology without asking for attention itself. The Stax 2G series won the EISA \"AV Furniture 2024-2025\" Award. Tell us about your room and your devices – at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we'll work out the right module heights for you before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Modular HiFi rack, 3 levels (base module + 2× Module 170)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Shelves ash plywood natural, side supports satin white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 475 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable surface per level (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height per level: 170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation layer between levels, side supports fillable with sand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 14.9 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: base module, 2× Module 170, feet ×4, M10 bolts ×4, bolt caps ×4, Blok assembly tool, height adjustment tool, quick guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow big is the Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rack measures 602 mm wide, 475 mm high, and 402 mm deep. Each level offers 480 × 379 mm of surface and 170 mm of usable height. Measure your tallest device beforehand – tube amplifiers usually need a Module 220 for this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a turntable fit on the top level?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, and that's the best place for it. The top level gets the least structure-borne vibration from below, and you can comfortably reach the tonearm and platter. Watch the 480 mm width and make sure the dust cover can swing freely backward when opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does a level withstand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUp to 40 kg per level. That covers heavy integrated amplifiers, power amps, and solid turntables. Put the heaviest device at the bottom, distribute the rest evenly, and place the rack on a load-bearing, level surface – then the structure stays permanently rigid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rack be added to later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Stax 2G is a building-block system made of a base module and levels in 120, 170, 220, plus an LP compartment. You undo the M10 fixings, insert the new module, and screw it back together. Ash Natural\/Satin White is available for all module sizes, so nothing looks mismatched.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we plan the configuration with you instead of leaving you alone with the building blocks: which module heights your devices need, whether spikes or pads belong on your floor, how the cables run cleanly. Our team in Wädenswil delivers and sets up on request.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFind what belongs on the levels here: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alle-verstaerker\"\u003eall amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e for the base, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers \u0026amp; network players\u003c\/a\u003e for the middle level, and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e for the very top. You'll find further furniture and stands under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel\"\u003eHiFi furniture \u0026amp; TV furniture\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989490987344,"sku":null,"price":950.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-3-shelf-hifi-rack-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442865"},{"product_id":"blokstax2g3schwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf HiFi Rack, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf is a modular HiFi rack with three levels whose shelves rest on a silicone isolation layer, and which can be expanded with further modules at any time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish uses 10 mm thick black glass and high-gloss black side supports – the most striking of the three variants, one that puts your gear on display rather than just parking it. The series is built by Blok in the UK, a brand of the Monitor Audio Group.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Stax 2G 3-Shelf?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBase module plus two Module 170s make three levels with 170 mm of usable height each – room for amplifier, source, and turntable. Glass adds around eleven kilos over plywood, and that mass works in your favour: the heavier the structure, the less it passes back to your gear. The system stays expandable regardless – heavy doesn't mean set in stone here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA heavy, calm base with real presence. A silicone layer decouples the levels, the hollow side supports can take sand if you want them to, and the four feet can be fitted with spikes or hard-floor pads and adjusted in height. Tinted glass has a pleasant side effect too: displays and brushed fronts stand out much better on it than on matte wood.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stax 2G 3-Shelf suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor systems that are allowed to be seen, and for rooms where a dark, glossy piece of furniture works. Straight talk: gloss and glass want a microfibre cloth now and then, or you'll soon be counting fingerprints instead of tracks. If you're after warmth in the room, the walnut or satin white variant suits you better – structurally the three finishes are identical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe heaviest and visually most striking Stax 2G variant – and for many systems the most fitting one, because dark electronics really come into their own on black glass. The series carries the EISA \"AV Furniture 2024-2025\" Award. Tell us which devices need to go on it, and at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we'll check heights, weights, and surface area for you in advance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Modular HiFi rack, 3 levels (base module + 2× Module 170)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Shelves tinted black glass, side supports high-gloss black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 467 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable surface per level (W × D): 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height per level: 170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 10 mm (glass)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation layer between levels, side supports fillable with sand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 25.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: base module, 2× Module 170, feet ×4, M10 bolts ×4, bolt caps ×4, Blok assembly tool, height adjustment tool, quick guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow heavy is the black glass finish?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe complete 3-Shelf rack weighs 25.6 kg in black glass, while the plywood finishes come in at just under 15 kg. The extra mass is intentional: it makes the structure heavier and thus less sensitive to structure-borne vibration. It's best to bring a second person along when setting it up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow big is the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the glass finish it measures 602 mm wide, 467 mm high, and 402 mm deep. Each level offers 480 × 387 mm of surface at 170 mm of usable height. For taller devices, add a Module 220, which can be fitted in later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs glass a sonic disadvantage as a rack shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The shelves don't sit rigidly but rather on a silicone isolation layer over the supports – glass acts here as a heavy, stiff plate. What matters more than the material is that the structure is bolted together, aligned level, and kept within the 40 kg per level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I expand the rack later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. You undo the M10 fixings, insert an additional Module 120, 170, 220, or LP, and screw it back together. That turns the 3-Shelf into a 4-Shelf. The modules are available in the same black glass finish, so the structure stays consistent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G 3-Shelf from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we tell you what actually matters in practice: which module heights your devices need, whether spikes or pads belong on your floor, and how to safely set up 25 kilos of glass. Our specialist team in Wädenswil delivers, sets up on request, and tidies the cabling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDark electronics look especially good on black glass: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e at the bottom, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players \u0026amp; CD transports\u003c\/a\u003e in the middle, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e on top. You'll find matching speakers under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/standlautsprecher\"\u003efloorstanding speakers\u003c\/a\u003e, and the rest under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/zubehor\"\u003eAll Accessories\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491020112,"sku":null,"price":950.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-3-shelf-hifi-rack-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442907"},{"product_id":"blokstax2g4escheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf HiFi Rack, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf is a modular HiFi rack with four levels, where silicone isolation pads decouple each level individually from the rest of the structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this finish, black-stained ash plywood shelves meet supports in natural walnut – the warmest material mix in the series. Dark electronics look less severe on it, yet the furniture itself still doesn't push itself into the foreground. The Stax 2G is built by Blok, the furniture brand of the British Monitor Audio Group.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Stax 2G 4-Shelf?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe configuration consists of the base module, two 170 mm levels, and one 220 mm level. The top tier also fits an AV receiver or a turntable with a dust cover, without you bumping into the level above when you cue up a record. At 708 mm total height, everything stays within easy reach, and because every module is available individually, the rack simply grows with you later – up to the recommended maximum height of 1100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour clean spots to stand your gear instead of a pile of devices on the sideboard. Silicone pads sit between the levels so vibrations don't travel from one device to another; each support has a rubber plug, so you can weight it with one to five litres of sand or granulate. A cutout for cables runs along the back of every level, and you set the four feet on spikes or hard-floor pads as you prefer. Honestly: if your system is currently stacked on top of itself, this is the biggest win you can buy for your living room and your system at the same time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stax 2G 4-Shelf suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor systems with three to five components – amplifier, turntable, streamer, player – that should stand properly without a piece of furniture taking over the room. Straight talk: if you only own an integrated amplifier and a streamer, the more compact 3-Shelf serves you better. And generous as 40 kg per level is, a pair of truly heavy mono power amps is better placed directly on the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA rack that can do both: look good and actually help acoustically. The EISA jury agreed and named the series EISA AV Furniture 2024-2025. Hi-Fi News summed up the test like this: \"Sensible and good-looking it is, but more importantly, the 'floating' levels, the rigid supports and shelf materials make acoustic sense too.\" (Hi-Fi News, 2024). What we at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil like most about this colour combination is that it works in living rooms where no other piece of HiFi furniture would be tolerated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Modular HiFi rack, 4 levels (base module + 2× 170 mm + 1× 220 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Shelves ash plywood black, supports walnut natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D): 708 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum height when expanded: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. load capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: supports fillable with 1–5 litres of inert material via rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable management: cutout at the back of every level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 20.3 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: rack modules, quick guide, assembly tool, height adjustment tool, 4× M10 screw, 4× screw cap, 4× foot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's the difference between the 3-Shelf and the 4-Shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4-Shelf has one more level and, at 708 mm, is around 23 cm taller than the 3-Shelf. The additional 220 mm level accommodates tall devices. As soon as you're fitting more than three components or planning a turntable with a dust cover, the 4-Shelf is the right choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much weight does a level carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUp to 40 kg per level, according to Blok. That covers integrated amplifiers, heavy power amps, and substantial turntables. A level surface is important: align the four feet cleanly with the tool provided, or the decoupling won't work the way it should.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I later reconfigure or expand the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. All Stax 2G modules can be combined with one another, so you can swap, add, or rearrange levels. Blok recommends a maximum height of 1100 mm – up to that point, you build freely as needed. The levels are available individually in 120, 170, and 220 mm, as well as an LP module.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the supports filled for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor extra mass and rigidity. Each support has a rubber plug; you can fill it with one to five litres of dry sand or quartz granulate. That calms the furniture's own resonances and makes the structure more stable – especially worthwhile on a springy wooden floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we tell you before you buy which level heights suit your devices and whether spikes or hard-floor pads belong on your floor. Our experienced specialist team in Wädenswil plans the setup with you and delivers fully assembled on request. Get in touch on 044 680 22 00 or by WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 220 mm level is for what benefits most from a calm stance: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e. Below it, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alle-verstaerker\"\u003eamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e find their place. If you want to go even further, take a look at our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/entkopplung\"\u003edecoupling\u003c\/a\u003e range.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491052880,"sku":null,"price":1300.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-4-shelf-hifi-rack-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442944"},{"product_id":"blokstax2g4eschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf HiFi Rack, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf is a four-tier, modular HiFi rack whose levels are individually decoupled via silicone pads and freely combinable in height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish combines shelves in natural ash plywood with supports in silky-matte satin white. It's the most understated of the three finishes – bright, friendly, and in a white-painted living room it barely registers as furniture at all. Blok is British, part of the Monitor Audio Group, and builds nothing but HiFi furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Stax 2G 4-Shelf?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe four levels are made up of the base module, two 170 mm levels, and one 220 mm level on top. The order is deliberate: flat electronics at the bottom, room to breathe at the top for a turntable with a dust cover or an AV receiver. Because every module is also available individually, the configuration doesn't have to stay as delivered – you keep building freely up to a total height of 1100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAbove all, calm underneath your gear. Between each level sits a silicone pad whose hardness Blok says it has specifically tuned. The supports are hollow and can be weighted with one to five litres of sand or granulate via rubber plugs. Add cable cutouts at the back of every level, height-adjustable feet with spikes for carpet and pads for hard flooring – and 40 kg load capacity per shelf. That's considerably more engineering than you'd credit a piece of furniture with at first glance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stax 2G 4-Shelf suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bright, modern rooms and for anyone who wants their system visibly on display without it turning into a wall of technology. Straight talk: satin white forgives less than dark surfaces, dust and fingerprints show up more readily. And if you're after a rack you set down once and never touch again, you're buying modularity here that you'll never use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok turned an accessory into a piece of furniture you're happy to look at even without a system on top – the EISA jury agreed and named the series EISA AV Furniture 2024-2025. Chris Baillie put it well at The Ear: \"The Blok Stax 2G's talents are more than skin deep.\" (The Ear, December 2024). At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, this is exactly the finish we'd reach for when the room is bright and the rack shouldn't be the first thing you notice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Modular HiFi rack, 4 levels (base module + 2× 170 mm + 1× 220 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Shelves ash plywood natural, supports satin white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D): 708 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum height when expanded: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. load capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: supports fillable with 1–5 litres of inert material via rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable management: cutout at the back of every level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 20.9 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: rack modules, quick guide, assembly tool, height adjustment tool, 4× M10 screw, 4× screw cap, 4× foot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much space do I have per level?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e480 × 379 mm of usable surface per shelf – enough for all common full-size components. Height is set by the modules: two levels are 170 mm tall, one is 220 mm. For a turntable with a dust cover, take the 220, and if in doubt, just ask us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need the spikes or the hard-floor pads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThat depends on your floor. On carpet you want the spikes, because they push through the pile and let the rack sit firmly on the subfloor – 22 mm tall. On parquet, laminate or stone, use the hard-floor pads at 14 mm. Both are included, and you decide at assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow heavy and how big is the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this plywood finish, the complete 4-Shelf weighs 20.9 kg and measures 708 × 602 × 402 mm in height, width and depth. That's light enough to carry with two people, and heavy enough to stand really solidly once the supports are filled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rack be expanded later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, that's the core of the system. All Stax 2G modules fit together, so you can add a level, swap one, or change the order. Blok states 1100 mm as the recommended maximum height. Modules are available in 120, 170 and 220 mm, plus an LP level for records.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we don't treat HiFi furniture as an afterthought. We work out with you which level heights your devices actually need, which colour suits your interior, and how the rack sits with the rest of your system. Advice by phone on 044 680 22 00, WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls) or shop@hdzuerisee.ch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe levels are best filled with \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e; matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003ebookshelf speakers\u003c\/a\u003e stand most sensibly alongside on their own \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491085648,"sku":null,"price":1300.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-4-shelf-hifi-rack-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442908"},{"product_id":"blokstax2g4schwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf HiFi Rack, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf in black glass is a modular HiFi rack with four levels made of 10 mm tempered black glass, individually decoupled via silicone pads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supports are made of ash plywood with a high-gloss black surface. Together with the dark glass, that makes this the most striking of the three finishes: it puts your gear on display instead of hiding it. Blok belongs to the British Monitor Audio Group and builds nothing but furniture for audio systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the glass variant, of all things?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause it brings mass. Fully assembled, this 4-Shelf weighs 35.0 kg, around 15 kg more than the plywood finishes – a heavier foundation that's less easily set into vibration. On top of that come two small but practical differences: the glass shelves offer 8 mm more usable depth at 480 × 387 mm, and the rack stands 11 mm lower at 697 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour standing spots that look as if they've always carried your gear. The configuration of base module, two 170 mm levels, and one 220 mm level also accommodates a turntable with a dust cover or an AV receiver. Silicone isolation pads work between the levels, the supports can be weighted with one to five litres of sand via rubber plugs, a cable cutout runs at the back of every level, and you set the feet on spikes or hard-floor pads. Every shelf carries 40 kg – more than most devices will ever demand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stax 2G 4-Shelf in black glass suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to deliberately put their system on display, and for dark, calm listening rooms where gloss and glass are allowed to work their magic. Straight talk: black glass is the dust magnet of the three variants and shows every fingerprint. Where kids or dogs romp through the living room, the plywood finishes are the more relaxed choice – and 35 kg isn't something you casually carry up the stairs alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe variant where you understand at first glance why a rack is more than a shelf. The series received the EISA AV Furniture Award 2024-2025 for it, and Hi-Fi News rated the Stax 2G at 85% in the Sound Quality category in its test (Hi-Fi News, 2024). If you're unsure whether glass or wood suits your room better, talk to us at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil – that question is settled in five minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Modular HiFi rack, 4 levels (base module + 2× 170 mm + 1× 220 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Shelves tempered black glass, supports ash plywood high-gloss black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D): 697 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum height when expanded: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. load capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: supports fillable with 1–5 litres of inert material via rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable management: cutout at the back of every level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 35.0 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: rack modules, quick guide, assembly tool, height adjustment tool, 4× M10 screw, 4× screw cap, 4× foot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre glass shelves acoustically worse than wood?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDifferent, not worse. Blok rates both materials for the same 40 kg load capacity and uses the same silicone decoupling for both. Glass brings more mass to the rack, plywood damps differently. Which variant suits you better is, in practice, mostly a matter of the room and your taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the glass variant weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e35.0 kg when assembled – around 15 kg more than the plywood finishes. Carry it with two people and set it up straight away in its final spot. The overall dimensions are 697 × 602 × 402 mm, making the rack 11 mm lower than the wood variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much space does a level offer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e480 × 387 mm of usable surface per shelf, so 8 mm more depth than the plywood shelves. That means deeper integrated amplifiers stand securely too. The modules set the height: two levels at 170 mm, one at 220 mm for taller devices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I add levels later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Stax 2G modules can be combined, added to, and rearranged; Blok names 1100 mm as the recommended maximum height. Individual levels come in 120, 170, and 220 mm, as well as an LP level. Do think about whether you deliberately want to mix glass and plywood levels or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G 4-Shelf from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause with a piece of glass furniture weighing 35 kg, the planning should happen beforehand, not while unpacking. We work out placement, flooring, level heights, and cable routing with you – and our technician Mauri assembles the rack at your place on request. Write to shop@hdzuerisee.ch or call 044 680 22 00.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe top level suits anything from \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alles-vinyl\"\u003eAll Vinyl\u003c\/a\u003e; below it, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/endstufen\"\u003epower amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e find their place. To give the cable cutouts at the back something to do, it's worth a look at \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003eCables \u0026amp; Connectors\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491118416,"sku":null,"price":1300.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-4-shelf-hifi-rack-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442943"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gbaseescheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G Base Module, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Base Module is the bottom level of the modular Stax 2G rack system – the base with the height-adjustable feet that every other level is placed on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this finish, black-stained ash meets natural walnut: a warm material mix that carries dark electronics without looking like a piece of technical furniture itself. The series is developed and built in the UK, by Blok – the furniture brand of the Monitor Audio Group.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Stax 2G Base Module?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a rack grows from the bottom up. The Base brings what a foundation needs: four height-adjustable feet, fitted with spikes for carpet or hard-floor pads for parquet, laminate, and stone. That keeps the structure stable even on an old building's floor that's seen better centuries. On top, you stack the build-up modules – 120, 170, and 220 mm for electronics, the LP module for records – in the order and heights that suit your devices. Blok recommends the system up to a total height of 1100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA load-bearing, decoupled level: 13 mm plywood on solid side supports, with silicone isolation pads in between whose Shore hardness the acoustic engineers at the Monitor Audio Group defined. The supports are hollow and can be filled with inert material through removable rubber plugs – around 0.7 litres per support. If you've ever weighted a rack with sand, you know the effect: more mass, less resonance, minimal effort. The level carries 40 kg, which covers practically every integrated amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Base Module suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to configure their own rack instead of taking a ready-made combination: you decide how many levels there'll be and how tall each one is. Straight talk: the Base alone isn't a rack yet. Without build-up modules, it's a flat platform for a single device – nicely made, but still just a plinth. If you need three or four levels from the start and don't want any custom heights, you'll get there faster with the ready-made 3-Shelf or 4-Shelf collections.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Base Module isn't a part you get excited about – it's the part that makes everything else possible. Cleanly made, understated in appearance, and the combination of black ash and walnut ages noticeably more gracefully than any high-gloss surface. If you're unsure which module heights suit your devices: that's exactly what we're here for at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil – we'll work through the configuration with you before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Base module (bottom level) of the modular Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Level ash black, side supports walnut natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLevel material: plywood, 13 mm thick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 109 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable surface (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 4.2 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: four pieces, height-adjustable – spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between level and support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: side supports fillable via removable rubber plugs, approx. 0.7 l per support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Stax 2G build-up modules 120, 170, 220, and LP\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum total height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), developed and made in the UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: base module, quick-start guide, assembly and adjustment tool, screws, cover caps, feet with spikes and hard-floor pads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Base Module alone enough as a HiFi rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a flat platform for a single device, yes; as a rack, no. The Base supplies the feet and the bottom level; the actual rack height only comes about once you add one or more build-up modules on top. That's exactly the point of the system: you decide the number and height of the levels yourself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich modules fit the Stax 2G Base Module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll build-up modules in the Stax 2G series: 120, 170, and 220 mm for electronics, plus the LP module for records. You stack them in any order until you reach the recommended total height of 1100 mm. It makes sense to place the tallest module where your largest device stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich feet suit which floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth variants are included. The 22 mm spikes pierce carpet and couple to the subfloor; the 14 mm hard-floor pads protect parquet, laminate, and stone. All four feet are height-adjustable with the included tool, so the rack stands calmly even on an uneven floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much weight does a level carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok states 40 kg per level – that covers practically every integrated amplifier, turntable, or CD player. What usually matters more is the surface: 480 × 379 mm is usable between the side supports. Measure your deepest device before deciding on a configuration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Base Module from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we tell you in advance which module heights suit your devices, instead of leaving you alone with the configurator. Our experienced specialist team in Wädenswil plans your Stax 2G rack through, delivers, and sets it up on site on request. Call us, write to us, or ask via WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNext come the levels on top: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eStax 2G build-up modules 120, 170, 220, and LP\u003c\/a\u003e are available in the same Ash Black\/Walnut finish – 120 mm for flat electronics, 170 and 220 mm for taller devices, the LP module for your record collection. You'll find the complete series in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBLOK collection\u003c\/a\u003e. And what goes on top: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alle-verstaerker\"\u003eamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491151184,"sku":null,"price":350.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-base-modul-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442943"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gbaseeschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G Base Module, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Base Module is the base level of the modular Stax 2G HiFi rack system – the module with the height-adjustable feet where every stack begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish combines a level in natural ash with silky-matte white side supports. Bright, friendly, understated – in a living room with plenty of white and wood, the rack almost disappears instead of dominating the space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy start with the Base Module?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the Base brings the floor coupling that no other level does. Four feet, individually adjustable in height with the included tool, fitted as spikes or hard-floor pads – so the tower sits just as solidly on carpet as on strip parquet. Everything else is up to you: on top of the Base go the build-up modules of 120, 170, and 220 mm for electronics, or the LP module for records, stacked up to the recommended total height of 1100 mm. A system instead of a finished piece of furniture – if you've ever bought a rack where exactly one level was two centimetres too low, you'll appreciate that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 13 mm plywood level on wide side supports, decoupled via silicone pads whose hardness was defined by the Monitor Audio Group's acoustics department. The supports are hollow inside; take out the rubber plugs and you can fill around 0.7 litres of inert material per support. More mass means less resonance in the furniture – which turntables in particular benefit from. The level is rated for 40 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Base Module suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor you, if your setup doesn't fit the standard grid: an unusually tall power amp, a turntable with a dust cover, a record collection that's still growing. Honestly: if you have a classic trio of amplifier, streamer, and turntable, you'll get there faster with the ready-made 3-Shelf collection and won't have to configure anything. You buy the Base individually when you want to plan your rack from the ground up yourself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnspectacular – in the best sense. The Base doesn't make a fuss about itself; it delivers a flat, decoupled, precisely levellable standing surface that the rest of the series sits on. The light finish is the coziest of the three and visually takes the bulk out of a large system. Tell us about your room and your devices – at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we'll put together the right module sequence for you before you open the first box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Base module (bottom level) of the modular Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Level ash natural, side supports satin white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLevel material: plywood, 13 mm thick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 109 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable surface (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 4.3 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: four pieces, height-adjustable – spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between level and support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: side supports fillable via removable rubber plugs, approx. 0.7 l per support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Stax 2G build-up modules 120, 170, 220, and LP\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum total height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), developed and made in the UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: base module, quick-start guide, assembly and adjustment tool, screws, cover caps, feet with spikes and hard-floor pads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's the difference between the Base Module and a build-up module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Base Module brings the height-adjustable feet and the bottom level, a build-up module doesn't. The 120, 170, 220, and LP modules sit on the Base and set the gap to the next level. No Stax 2G stands without a Base, and without a build-up module, you're left with a single level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I expand my Stax 2G later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, at any time. You can add another build-up module even years later, as long as the recommended total height of 1100 mm isn't exceeded. If a new component joins your system, you simply order the module in the right height – just make sure it's the same colour finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall can a Stax 2G rack get?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok recommends a maximum total height of 1100 mm. That corresponds to the Base Module plus around four to five build-up modules, depending on the heights chosen. Below that, the stack stays stable and easy to handle. If you want to build taller, it's better to put up two narrow towers side by side than one wobbly one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a turntable fit on the Base Module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the usable surface of 480 × 379 mm accommodates most turntables. What to consider is the height above it: a turntable with a dust cover needs plenty of clearance, so within a Stax 2G it usually gets the top level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Base Module from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause here you get advice from someone who knows the series: we tell you which module heights your devices actually need and which order makes sense day to day. HD Zürisee in Wädenswil delivers, sets up on site on request, and stays reachable afterwards – by phone, email, or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWithout levels on top, it stays a plinth: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eStax 2G build-up modules 120, 170, 220, and LP\u003c\/a\u003e are available to match in Ash Natural\/Satin White – the flat modules for electronics, the LP module for records. You'll find an overview of the whole series, including the ready-made 3-Shelf and 4-Shelf collections, under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBLOK\u003c\/a\u003e. And for the levels themselves: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alle-quellen\"\u003esources\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alle-verstaerker\"\u003eamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alles-vinyl\"\u003eeverything vinyl\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491183952,"sku":null,"price":350.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-base-modul-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442943"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gbaseschwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G Base Module, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Base Module in black glass is the foundation of the modular Stax 2G rack system: a level of tempered black glass on height-adjustable feet, onto which every build-up module is placed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh-gloss black side supports, 10 mm tinted glass, no visible screws – this is the most striking of the three finishes. It puts your gear on display instead of hiding it. If you own black electronics, this is where they get the presentation to match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Base Module in black glass?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Base is the only module in the Stax 2G system that contacts the floor. It carries the four height-adjustable feet, which you fit with either spikes (22 mm) for carpet or hard-floor pads (14 mm) for parquet, laminate, and stone, and it thereby compensates for a floor that isn't too precise about being level. On top, you keep building freely: 120, 170, and 220 mm for electronics, the LP module for records – up to the recommended total height of 1100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA level of 10 mm tempered black glass with 480 × 387 mm of usable surface, slightly more than the plywood variants thanks to the thinner panel. It's carried by hollow side supports with silicone isolation pads, whose Shore hardness was defined by the Monitor Audio Group's acoustic development team. Through removable rubber plugs, you can fill around 0.7 litres of inert material per support. At 7.9 kg, this variant is almost twice as heavy as the wood finishes – mass that a rack rarely resents. The level is rated for 40 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Base Module suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants a visible rack and configures their own system instead of taking a ready-made combination. Straight talk: gloss and glass are honest about dust and fingerprints – if you're not going to reach for a microfibre cloth now and then, you'll be happier with one of the two wood finishes. And as with every Base: on its own, it's a single level, not a rack. The height only comes about with the build-up modules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe black glass finish is the most uncompromising in the series: dark, smooth, calm – and it lets the devices above it seem to float rather than disappear into the furniture. There's nothing to fault in the craftsmanship, the edges are clean, and levelling it takes just one hand. If you want to know which module heights your system needs: call us at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we'll go through your device list with you together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Base module (bottom level) of the modular Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Level tempered black glass, side supports high-gloss black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLevel material: tinted safety glass, 10 mm thick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 107 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable surface (W × D): 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 7.9 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: four pieces, height-adjustable – spike 22 mm or hard-floor pad 14 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between level and support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: side supports fillable via removable rubber plugs, approx. 0.7 l per support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Stax 2G build-up modules 120, 170, 220, and LP\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum total height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), developed and made in the UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: base module, quick-start guide, assembly and adjustment tool, screws, cover caps, feet with spikes and hard-floor pads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich build-up modules fit the Base Module in black glass?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll Stax 2G build-up modules in the same finish: 120, 170, and 220 mm for electronics, plus the LP module for records. They're placed on top in any order and screwed together. Blok recommends stopping at a total height of 1100 mm – that keeps the tower standing safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy does the glass variant weigh more than the wood finishes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause tempered glass is simply denser than plywood. The Base Module in black glass tips the scale at 7.9 kg, the plywood variants at 4.2 to 4.3 kg. That doesn't change the load capacity: both materials are rated at 40 kg per level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a glass level sound different from a wood level?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok selected both materials for load-bearing capacity and acoustic behaviour; the manufacturer doesn't quote reliable measurements for a difference. In practice, what matters more is that the level sits decoupled and the supports are damped. So deciding by looks here is entirely legitimate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow do I care for glass and gloss?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a soft, slightly damp microfibre cloth and no abrasive agents. High-gloss lacquer and tinted glass show dust and fingerprints more clearly than matte wood – but they're clean again in seconds. Devices with sharp-edged feet are better placed on felt pads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Base Module from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we help plan your rack rather than just shipping you a box: which module heights suit your devices, which device belongs on which level, how the cabling stays tidy. Our team in Wädenswil delivers and sets up on site on request. Get in touch by phone, email, or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe base is set – now comes the height: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eStax 2G build-up modules 120, 170, 220, and LP\u003c\/a\u003e are also available in black glass with high-gloss black, from the flat 120 to the LP module for your record collection. You'll find the complete series, including the ready-made 3-Shelf and 4-Shelf collections, in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBLOK collection\u003c\/a\u003e. For the levels above: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alle-verstaerker\"\u003eamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e, and matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491216720,"sku":null,"price":350.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-base-modul-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442978"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul120escheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 120, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 120 is a build-up level for the modular Stax 2G rack system, creating 120 mm of usable height above the level below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish sets a black-stained ash plywood level next to side panels in natural walnut. A calm material mix that works alongside light electronics as well as dark ones – and gives your rack the look of a piece of furniture rather than a server cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 120?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause standard spacings rarely suit your devices. A Stax 2G isn't bought, it's built: you start at the bottom with the Base Module and stack on top exactly the heights your components need. 120 mm is the flattest level in the series, tailored to streamers, D\/A converters, phono preamps, and slim preamplifiers. If a different device joins later, you swap the level – not the whole rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 13 mm plywood level that carries 40 kg. Silicone isolation pads sit between shelf and support, their Shore hardness defined by the acoustic engineers at the Monitor Audio Group; they keep structure-borne vibration away from the device. The supports themselves can be weighted via removable rubber plugs with around 1.4 litres of inert material per support – more mass, less resonance. Four M10 screws firmly connect the module to the level below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 120 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor you, if you own or are planning a Stax 2G and want to fit a flat component without wasting clearance. Straight talk: the Module 120 doesn't work as a starting point – without a Base Module with feet and height adjustment, it simply doesn't stand. And if you're planning a power amp with tall heat sinks or a turntable with a dust cover, you're better served by 170, 220, or LP. Honestly: two minutes with a tape measure here saves you a return.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn honest component without airs. The Module 120 gets exactly one thing right: it gives flat devices their own decoupled level at the height they actually need. Black ash on walnut is the coziest of the three finishes here – the only one that still looks good even when there's no high-gloss gear sitting on top. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we're happy to work out beforehand which heights your setup needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build-up module for the modular Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height: 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Plywood level ash black, side panels walnut natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D): 135 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 4.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between shelf and support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: approx. 1.4 l fill volume per support, removable rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), developed and made in the UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 4× M10 screw\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Module 120 fit any Stax 2G rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. All Stax 2G modules share the same footprint and the same screw fitting, so you can stack them in any order. The Base Module always belongs at the bottom, because that's where the feet, height adjustment, and tools come with it. Blok recommends a maximum total height of 1100 mm. That keeps the structure stable even fully loaded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich module height do I need for my device?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeasure your component's height and add some clearance for cables and ventilation. 120 mm is enough for streamers, converters, and slim preamps. 170 mm suits most integrated amplifiers and CD players, 220 mm suits tall devices, and the LP module at 350 mm suits turntables and records.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much weight does a level carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e40 kg per level. That covers practically every integrated amplifier, turntable, and power amp in the usual class. If you're stacking heavier gear, additionally fill the supports with inert material – around 1.4 litres per support are provided for this. That increases the mass and noticeably calms the structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need extra tools for assembly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The module comes with four M10 screws; the Blok assembly wrench and the height adjustment tool are part of the Base Module's included items. So if you're expanding an existing configuration, you already have everything on hand and can screw in the new level within minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 120 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we plan your rack with you instead of leaving you alone with the configurator: which heights your devices need, how many levels make sense, what suits your floor. Our experienced specialist team in Wädenswil knows these setups, and Mauri handles delivery and assembly on request. Call us, write to us, or get in touch via WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Module 120 is a component, not a complete rack. Below it belongs a Base Module with feet and height adjustment, above it further levels: Module 170 for amplifiers and players, Module 220 for tall devices, Module LP for turntables and record collections. You'll find all modules and finishes in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBlok overview\u003c\/a\u003e, ready-configured alternatives among the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. And for the level itself: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/dac\"\u003eD\/A converters\u003c\/a\u003e, or a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vorverstarker\"\u003epreamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491249488,"sku":null,"price":285.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-120-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442979"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul120eschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 120, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 120 is a build-up level for the modular Stax 2G rack system, providing 120 mm of usable height for flat components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this finish, natural ash plywood meets silky-matte white side panels. Bright, quiet, understated – a rack that doesn't stand out as a foreign object in a light-filled living room but simply blends into the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 120?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA Stax 2G isn't an off-the-shelf shelf, it's a building-block system. Instead of fixed compartment heights, you choose the level that suits each device – and 120 mm is the lowest of them. For a network player, a converter, or a phono preamp, that's exactly right: the device sits cleanly ventilated, without ten centimetres of clearance going to waste above it. If your system changes, the level changes with it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 13 mm thick plywood level with 480 × 379 mm of usable surface, rated for 40 kg. Decoupling is handled by silicone pads of defined Shore hardness that sit between shelf and supports – Blok belongs to the Monitor Audio Group, and the acoustics department clearly had a say here. If you want it even calmer, take the rubber plugs out of the supports and fill them with around 1.4 litres of inert material per support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 120 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone expanding their Stax 2G or planning it thoroughly from the start. Honestly: on its own, this module is useless – feet, height adjustment, and assembly tools come with the Base Module, without which nothing here stands. And 120 mm is tightly sized: an integrated amplifier with heat sinks or a turntable with a dust cover needs 170, 220, or LP outright. If you measure your device beforehand, you save yourself a second attempt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnspectacular – in the best sense. The Module 120 solves a problem most racks don't even acknowledge: that devices simply come in different heights. Ash natural with satin white is the quietest variant in the series here, and the first choice when the furniture shouldn't stand out. Tell us at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil what's going on the levels – we'll tell you which heights you really need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build-up module for the modular Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height: 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Plywood level ash natural, side panels satin white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D): 135 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 4.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between shelf and support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: approx. 1.4 l fill volume per support, removable rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), developed and made in the UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 4× M10 screw\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I fit the Module 120 into an existing rack later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. You undo the screws above the desired position, insert the Module 120, and screw it in with the four included M10 screws. The footprint is identical across all Stax 2G modules, and the order of the levels is entirely up to you. Set aside a calm half-hour for the change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow do I know if 120 mm is enough?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeasure your device's total height including feet, and add some clearance for cables and heat. If it stays under around 100 mm, the Module 120 fits comfortably. Above that, go for the Module 170, for tall devices the Module 220, and for turntables with a dust cover the Module LP.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does a level withstand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok states 40 kg per level – more than any typical HiFi device weighs. More important than the maximum is the calm in the structure: silicone pads decouple every level, and the supports can be weighted with around 1.4 litres of inert material per support, which further dampens resonance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included in delivery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour M10 screws, nothing more is needed. Assembly tool, height adjustment tool, screw caps, and the feet are part of the Base Module and thus already present in your rack. The Module 120 is deliberately designed as a pure add-on, not a standalone piece of furniture. So if you're starting completely fresh, you always begin with the Base Module.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 120 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a rack is more than a parts list. We look at which devices you have, how tall they are, and how many levels genuinely make sense – and we'll also tell you if a different module height would be the better choice. Specialist advice from Wädenswil, delivery and assembly on request. Get in touch by phone, email, or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the very bottom, your structure needs a Base Module with feet and height adjustment; above it, Module 120, Module 170, Module 220, and Module LP can be freely combined – all heights and finishes are in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBlok overview\u003c\/a\u003e. If you'd rather take a ready-configured rack, you'll find it among the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. A 120 level typically suits \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/dac\"\u003eD\/A converters\u003c\/a\u003e, or a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/phono-vorverstarker\"\u003ephono preamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491478864,"sku":null,"price":285.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-120-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.jpg?v=1785442979"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul120schwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 120, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 120 is a build-up level for the modular Stax 2G rack system with 120 mm of usable height – here with a tempered glass panel instead of plywood.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish combines 10 mm thick black glass with high-gloss black side panels. At 8.3 kg, it's almost twice as heavy as the wood variants – and the only one that puts your gear literally on a stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 120?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a Stax 2G grows to measure. You set the level height per device instead of arranging things around standard compartments. 120 mm is the flattest step in the series and thus the level for streamers, D\/A converters, phono preamps, and slim preamplifiers. If a taller device joins later, you simply slide a bigger module in between instead of replacing the whole rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA tempered glass level 10 mm thick with 480 × 387 mm of usable surface, rated up to 40 kg. Glass naturally brings more inherent mass than plywood – 8.3 instead of 4.6 kg – and it sits on the same silicone isolation pads, whose Shore hardness was determined by the Monitor Audio Group's acoustics department. The supports each hold around 1.4 litres of inert filler material, if you want it even calmer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 120 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor you, if your Stax 2G needs to house a flat component and you want to carry the glass look through. Straight talk: glass wants to be cleaned. Dust and fingerprints show mercilessly on black glass – if that's not for you, you'll be more relaxed with ash. And like the wood variants, this module isn't a soloist either: without a Base Module with feet and height adjustment, the foundation is missing. For tall devices, there's 170, 220, and LP.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe most striking of the three finishes – and the one with the most inherent weight. If you already have glass levels in your rack, there's no getting around this variant; if you're planning fresh, factor in the cleaning effort honestly. Technically, the glass module does nothing differently from the wood version, it just brings more mass. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we're happy to tell you whether glass or wood is the better choice for your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build-up module for the modular Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height: 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Tempered black glass, side panels high-gloss black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D): 133 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 10 mm (tempered glass)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 8.3 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between shelf and support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMass loading: approx. 1.4 l fill volume per support, removable rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), developed and made in the UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 4× M10 screw\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat distinguishes the glass finish from the wood variants?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaterial, mass, and overall height. The glass level is 10 mm thick and weighs 8.3 kg, the plywood levels are 13 mm thick and weigh 4.6 kg. That makes the glass module 133 mm tall instead of 135 mm. Usable height and load capacity are identical, and the usable surface is minimally larger at 480 × 387 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix glass and wood modules in the same rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, mechanically everything fits together: same footprint, same M10 fitting. Just note that the total height changes slightly depending on the mix, since glass modules are two millimetres flatter than the plywood versions. Visually, the combination is a matter of taste – a single consistent finish usually looks calmer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich devices does 120 mm of usable height suit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlat components such as streamers, D\/A converters, phono preamps, and slim preamplifiers. Measure your device including feet and leave some clearance for cables and heat. Taller devices such as integrated amplifiers or CD players usually run on 170 mm, turntables with a dust cover on 220 mm or on the Module LP.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs black glass fragile?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's tempered safety glass and carries 40 kg just like the wood level. What's more sensitive is the look: dust and fingerprints show up more clearly on dark glass than on wood. A microfibre cloth is enough, but you'll reach for it more often than with the ash finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 120 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we go through your rack with you from bottom to top before you order: which devices go on which level, which heights are missing, and whether glass or wood suits your room better. Advice from Wädenswil, service from our own technician, delivery and assembly on request. Call us, write an email, or use WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelow the Module 120 belongs a Base Module in black glass; above it, Module 170, Module 220, and Module LP can be freely stacked – all components in the series are in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBlok overview\u003c\/a\u003e. You'll find ready-configured racks among the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. The level itself suits \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/dac\"\u003eD\/A converters\u003c\/a\u003e, or a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vorverstarker\"\u003epreamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e; matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003ecables\u003c\/a\u003e are available too.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491511632,"sku":null,"price":285.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-120-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785442979"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul170escheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 170, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 170 is a build-up level for the modular Blok Stax 2G HiFi rack, providing 170 mm of usable height for one device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis finish combines black-stained ash with natural walnut – a warm, calm material mix that looks neither like a furniture store nor a studio shelf, and sits equally well next to light and dark electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 170?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a rack should adapt to your devices, not the other way round. The Stax 2G consists of levels with graduated usable heights that you stack freely. The 170 is the workhorse level here: integrated amplifiers, CD players, streamers and most turntables without a dust cover fit underneath it. You set it on the base module or between existing levels, bringing your rack step by step closer to your system instead of living with fixed standard spacings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA shelf made from 13 mm thick plywood, carried by four supports that connect invisibly with M10 screws into the level below. Silicone isolation pads sit between the levels and against the base, damping structure-borne sound before it reaches the device. The supports are hollow and each hold around 2.2 litres of inert material – dry sand or quartz granulate will do. You can load each level with up to 40 kg, so even power amps that treat weight as a quality mark are no problem.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 170 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone expanding their Stax 2G or planning one from scratch. Straight talk: the Module 170 doesn't stand alone – it strictly needs a base module underneath, because that's where the feet, spikes and assembly tool are included. If your turntable has a dust cover or your tube amplifier needs headroom, take the Module 220 instead; for the record collection there's the Module LP. Blok recommends a maximum of 1100 mm for the whole build – beyond that, even the nicest stack gets unsteady.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Module 170 is the level most people end up needing two of. It covers the majority of common HiFi devices, it looks homely rather than technical in Ash Black\/Walnut, and it can be rearranged later as your system grows. The Stax 2G system was awarded the EISA \"AV Furniture 2024-2025\" prize – a nice confirmation for a piece of furniture you usually only notice once it's missing. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we plan the stack with you before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Build-up module for the Blok Stax 2G HiFi rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUsable height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOverall dimensions (H × W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 185 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShelf:\u003c\/strong\u003e 13 mm plywood, ash black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ash Black \/ Walnut natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDecoupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e silicone isolation pads between levels and against the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDamping:\u003c\/strong\u003e hollow supports, fillable with approx. 2.2 l inert material each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLoad capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.2 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMax. recommended build height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1100 mm (total rack)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eManufacturer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Blok (Monitor Audio Group), Saffron Walden, UK\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4× M10 screws (feet, spikes and assembly tool belong to the base module)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall can devices on the Module 170 be?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUp to 170 mm. That's the usable height between the shelf and the level above. For devices that get warm, add a few millimetres of clearance for ventilation, and factor in the space that stiff mains and speaker cables need at the back. Otherwise it's an exact fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need a base module for the Module 170?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Module 170 is a build-up level with no feet of its own; height-adjustable feet with spikes, the assembly tool and the setup instructions belong to the base module. The module itself comes with four M10 screws, which you use to set it onto the level below. You don't need anything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much weight does a level carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e40 kg per level, according to Blok. That means heavy integrated amplifiers and power amps are no issue at all. If you like it really calm, fill the hollow supports with dry sand – around 2.2 litres per support – and take the last bit of resonance out of the build.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix the Module 170 with other module heights?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, all Stax 2G modules stack freely and can be rearranged later. Common choices are 120 mm for flat devices, 170 mm for amplifiers and players, 220 mm for tall components, and the Module LP for record storage. Blok recommends a maximum of 1100 mm total height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 170 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we work out with you beforehand which levels you actually need – device heights, cable routing, floor type. Our specialist team in Wädenswil plans the stack, and our technician Mauri assembles and levels it at your place on request. Call us on 044 680 22 00, WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls), or email.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Module 170 needs a foundation and gets along well with neighbours: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gbaseescheblnussbaum\"\u003eBlok Stax 2G Base Module in Ash Black\/Walnut\u003c\/a\u003e as the bottom level, plus \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul120escheblnussbaum\"\u003eModule 120\u003c\/a\u003e for flat devices, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul220escheblnussbaum\"\u003eModule 220\u003c\/a\u003e for tall components and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodullpescheblnussbaum\"\u003eModule LP\u003c\/a\u003e for the record collection. What goes on top you'll find among \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and in \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streaming\"\u003estreaming\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491544400,"sku":null,"price":300.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-170-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785443013"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul170eschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 170, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 170 is a build-up level for the modular Blok Stax 2G HiFi rack, with 170 mm of usable height for one component.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNatural ash meets silky-matte satin white here: bright, friendly, understated – the version for living rooms where the system should play along, not dominate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 170?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause fixed standard spacings are always wrong for some component. With the Stax 2G, you decide the height of each level yourself by combining modules. With 170 mm of usable height, this level covers most of what sits in a typical system: integrated amplifiers, CD players, streamers, DACs with a decent power supply. It goes on the Base Module or between existing levels – you can add to it any time, and rearrange just as easily.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 13 mm plywood shelf in natural ash, four supports in satin white, and four M10 screws that connect invisibly into the level below. Silicone isolation pads sit between every level and against the base, decoupling each shelf individually. If you want it even quieter, fill the hollow supports with about 2.2 litres of dry sand each. 40 kg per level is rated – more than most components ever put on the scale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 170 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor you, if you're building a light-coloured Stax 2G from scratch or adding a level to an existing one. Straight talk: the module isn't a stand-alone piece of furniture. Without a Base Module underneath, it has no feet, spikes, or assembly tool. If your component is taller than 17 centimetres – a turntable with a lid, a tube amp with an exposed transformer – a Module 220 or the Module LP belongs there instead. And Blok doesn't recommend more than 1100 mm total height for the stack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn Ash Natural\/Satin White, the Stax 2G disappears pleasantly into bright rooms without looking cheap – and the Module 170 is the level in it you'll need most often. The EISA gave the Stax 2G system the \"AV Furniture 2024-2025\" award; what we like most is how matter-of-factly the system admits that a rack is, first and foremost, a tool. Tell us at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil which components need a home – we'll work out the rest for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Build-up module for the Blok Stax 2G HiFi rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOuter dimensions (H × W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 185 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShelf:\u003c\/strong\u003e 13 mm plywood, ash natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ash Natural \/ Satin White\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecoupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e silicone isolation pads between levels and against the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDamping:\u003c\/strong\u003e hollow supports, fillable with approx. 2.2 l of inert material each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLoad capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.3 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. recommended stack height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1100 mm (total rack)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eManufacturer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Blok (Monitor Audio Group), Saffron Walden, United Kingdom\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 × M10 screws (feet, spikes and assembly tool are part of the Base Module)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall can a component on the Module 170 be?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e170 millimetres, max. That's the clearance between the shelf and the next level above it. For components that run warm, allow a few millimetres of extra room for ventilation, and remember the space that stiff power and RCA cables need at the back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the Module 170 on its own?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, it's a build-up level and belongs on a Base Module or another Stax 2G level. The height-adjustable feet with spikes, the assembly tool and the instructions are part of the Base Module. The Module 170 itself comes with four M10 screws for connecting downward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow heavy can my component be?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok rates each level at 40 kilograms. That covers practically every integrated amp, power amp and turntable in the HiFi world. For extra stability, you can fill the hollow supports with about 2.2 litres of dry sand each; that adds mass to the whole build.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Module 170 fit with the other Stax 2G modules?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, every module in the series shares the same footprint and can be combined freely, and restacked later. It comes in 120, 170 and 220 millimetres of usable height, plus the Module LP for records. Blok recommends a maximum total height of 1100 millimetres.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 170 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we plan your rack before the purchase, not after. We know the build heights of the components we sell ourselves, and we'll tell you which levels you actually need. Our technician handles setup and alignment on request. Reach us at 044 680 22 00, on WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls), or by email.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNothing works without a base: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gbaseeschesatinweiss\"\u003eBlok Stax 2G Base Module in Ash Natural\/Satin White\u003c\/a\u003e forms the bottom level. From there, combine freely with the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul120eschesatinweiss\"\u003eModule 120\u003c\/a\u003e, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul220eschesatinweiss\"\u003eModule 220\u003c\/a\u003e, and the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodullpeschesatinweiss\"\u003eModule LP\u003c\/a\u003e for records. You'll find the matching electronics under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streaming\"\u003estreaming\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491577168,"sku":null,"price":300.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-170-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.jpg?v=1785443013"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul170schwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 170, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 170 is a build-up level for the modular Blok Stax 2G HiFi rack, offering 170 mm of usable height – here with a tempered, tinted glass shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e10 mm black glass, gloss black supports: the most eye-catching of the three finishes. If you want to show off your electronics rather than hide them, this is the one for you – fingerprints included, let's be honest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 170?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a rack you can adapt later stays useful longer. The Stax 2G is a modular construction: a Base Module at the bottom, with levels in four heights on top. The 170 hits the most common build height in HiFi – integrated amplifiers, CD players, network players, slim turntables. When a new component arrives, you swap or add a level instead of replacing the whole piece of furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA shelf made of 10 mm thick, tinted and tempered glass on four gloss black supports, connected invisibly with four M10 screws. Silicone isolation pads decouple every level from the one below; the supports can each be filled with about 2.2 litres of dry sand – the cheapest sound upgrade you'll ever buy. The level is rated for 40 kg. At 8.9 kg, the glass module weighs noticeably more than the plywood versions, which helps the build rather than hurting it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 170 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone expanding or newly planning their Stax 2G in Black Glass. Straight talk: the Module 170 only works on a Base Module – feet, spikes and tools are in that box. If you're generally not a fan of glass because every speck of dust shows, ash is the better choice. For components taller than 17 centimetres, the Module 220 is the one to use, and the Module LP for your record collection. And according to Blok, the stack shouldn't exceed 1100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlack Glass is the finish for people who want to put their system on display, and the Module 170 is the standard level within it: fits almost anything, stays adaptable later. The Stax 2G system was honoured by the EISA with the \"AV Furniture 2024-2025\" award – racks rarely win prizes, but this one did. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we work out beforehand exactly how many levels you need and at what height, so nothing's left over at the end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Build-up module for the Blok Stax 2G HiFi rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 170 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOuter dimensions (H × W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 183 × 602 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShelf:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10 mm tinted, tempered black glass\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e Black Glass \/ Gloss Black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecoupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e silicone isolation pads between levels and against the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDamping:\u003c\/strong\u003e hollow supports, fillable with approx. 2.2 l of inert material each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLoad capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.9 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. recommended stack height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1100 mm (total rack)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eManufacturer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Blok (Monitor Audio Group), Saffron Walden, United Kingdom\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 × M10 screws (feet, spikes and assembly tool are part of the Base Module)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat component height fits under the Module 170?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUp to 170 millimetres, measured from the glass shelf to the underside of the next level. For components that give off heat, leave a little margin for ventilation, and factor in the space that thick power or speaker cables need behind the component.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the black glass sturdy enough for heavy components?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Blok rates every level at 40 kilograms of load capacity, regardless of whether the shelf is glass or plywood. It uses 10 millimetre thick, tempered glass. That's plenty for power amps, integrated amplifiers and heavy turntables. The level itself weighs 8.9 kilograms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included with the module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour M10 screws, which connect the level invisibly to the module below. Height-adjustable feet with spikes, the Blok assembly tool and the setup instructions come with the Base Module, not with the individual build-up levels. Without a Base Module, the Module 170 can't be set up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix black glass and wood modules?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTechnically yes, the footprint and screw fixing are the same across all finishes. Visually it rarely looks coherent, so most people stick to one variant. Within the series, the 120, 170, 220 and LP heights can be freely stacked, up to a maximum total height of 1100 millimetres.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 170 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a rack isn't just a matter of taste – it's a question of component heights, cable routing and flooring. We go through it with you before you order, and align the finished build at your home on request. Reach us at 044 680 22 00, WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls), or by email.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the Module 170 belongs the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gbaseschwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eBlok Stax 2G Base Module in Black Glass\u003c\/a\u003e. You can extend the stack with the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul120schwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eModule 120\u003c\/a\u003e for slim components, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul220schwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eModule 220\u003c\/a\u003e for tall components, and the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodullpschwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eModule LP\u003c\/a\u003e for records. You'll find matching components under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streaming\"\u003estreaming\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491609936,"sku":null,"price":300.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-170-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785443013"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul220escheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 220, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 220 is a build-up level for the modular Stax 2G rack system with 220 mm of usable height, in black-stained ash with supports in natural walnut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt isn't a stand-alone rack but a level: you place it on an existing Stax 2G Base Module and build your tower exactly as tall as your components demand. The material mix of dark ash and warm walnut cuts a good figure even when the system is switched off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 220?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e220 mm is the most generous level below the LP module. It's meant for the components that outgrow 170 mm: AV receivers with cooling fins, tube amplifiers, tall power supplies, or a turntable whose lid should be allowed to stay open. Instead of buying a standard rack and improvising afterwards, you choose the height per level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery level rests on silicone isolation pads whose grooves fit over the connecting bolts of the level below – vibrations stay where they start, and the build remains bolted together and tip-proof all the same. The side supports are hollow and can be filled with about three litres of inert damping material through concealed plugs. Anyone who gives their rack that extra mass notices it most under a turntable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 220 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who already owns a Stax 2G or is planning one and needs to house at least one tall component. Straight talk: if you're only stacking slim streamers and slim-line players, you're wasting build height here – 120 or 170 mm is the smarter choice. Anyone buying this module as a starting point is also left without a Base Module, since feet, spikes and tools come exclusively with that. And the finish should match the existing rack, or the tower turns into a colour sample board.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Module 220 is the level that turns an attractive piece of furniture into the right one. Cleanly made, consistently decoupled, and in this combination pleasantly homely rather than technical. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we plan out your tower in advance – so you don't end up ordering one level too few. That's the single most common mistake with modular racks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build-up module for the Blok Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height: 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOuter dimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 235 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf: 13 mm ash plywood, black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide supports: natural walnut, hollow – fillable with inert damping material through concealed plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport fill volume: 3.0 l\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads with grooves that fit over the connecting bolts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 5.8 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok, Essex (UK) – part of the Monitor Audio Group since 2019\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer's warranty: 2 years\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 4× M10 connecting bolts (tool, feet and bolt caps come with the Base Module)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall can my component be on the Module 220?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e220 mm of usable height is available, at 480 mm width and 379 mm depth. Add one to two centimetres of clearance to the component height for ventilation and connectors. That comfortably fits AV receivers, tall tube amplifiers and most turntables with a lid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Module 220 sit on?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn a Blok Stax 2G Base Module or on an existing Stax 2G level. Four M10 bolts connect the modules, and the silicone pads' grooves fit over the bolt heads. Blok recommends a maximum total height of 1100 mm for the finished tower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much weight does a level carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e40 kilograms per level, the same for every Stax 2G module. That puts you on the safe side with practically every integrated amplifier, power amp and turntable. The module itself weighs 5.8 kilograms; the hollow supports additionally hold about three litres of damping material.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix different module heights?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, that's exactly what the system is built for. You can freely combine 120, 170, 220 and LP on top of each other, as long as the finish stays the same. That way every component gets the height it needs, instead of everything having to make do with the same standard spacing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 220 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we work out your tower with you before you order: component heights, cable runs, flooring, total height. Our experienced team in Wädenswil has been in the industry for decades and will also tell you when one level fewer is enough. Call us or write to us on WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Module 220 requires a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gbaseescheblnussbaum\"\u003eStax 2G Base Module in Ash Black\/Walnut\u003c\/a\u003e – that's where the feet, spikes and tools come with. For slim components, add the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul120escheblnussbaum\"\u003eModule 120\u003c\/a\u003e; for amplifiers and players, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul170escheblnussbaum\"\u003eModule 170\u003c\/a\u003e; for your record collection, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodullpescheblnussbaum\"\u003eModule LP\u003c\/a\u003e. You'll find the whole series and finished towers under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBlok\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. And what goes on top: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers \u0026amp; network players\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491642704,"sku":null,"price":350.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-220-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785443052"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul220eschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 220, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 220 is a 220 mm tall build-up level for the modular Stax 2G rack system, here in natural ash with silky-matte satin white supports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis level never stands alone. It's placed on a Stax 2G Base Module or an existing tier and extends the rack upward. The bright combination of ash natural and satin white almost disappears into light-coloured living rooms instead of dominating them with black technology.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 220?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause not every component is flat. 220 mm of usable height is room for the class above standard components: multi-channel AV electronics, tube amplifiers with exposed transformers, large power supplies, or a turntable whose lid doesn't need to come off every time. You determine the height per tier – no off-the-shelf rack can do that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get from it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecoupling doesn't happen with accessories, but in the build itself: silicone isolation pads with built-in grooves fit over the connecting bolts of the level below, so the tier and the component stay acoustically separate while the tower still forms one mechanical unit. The side supports are hollow and can be weighted with about three litres of inert material through concealed plugs. Anyone who's ever had a resonating sideboard under a turntable knows what that's worth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 220 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Stax 2G owners whose collection of components has grown, and for anyone designing their rack from the start around a tall component. Straight talk: bought on its own, the module makes no sense – without a Base Module, it has no feet, spikes or tools. And if your system consists entirely of slim streamers and slim-line players, the 220 mm tier is simply oversized; 120 or 170 mm is the more honest recommendation then. The finish must match the existing rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn unspectacular component that gets exactly one thing right: it finally gives the largest component in the system its place, without the rest of the rack suffering for it. Build quality and precision fit are at the level you'd expect from Blok. We at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil work through the tiers with you beforehand, so the order is right the first time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build-up module for the Blok Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height: 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOuter dimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 235 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf: 13 mm ash plywood, natural\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide supports: satin white, hollow – fillable with inert damping material through concealed plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport fill volume: 3.0 l\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads with grooves that fit over the connecting bolts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 6.0 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok, Essex (UK) – part of the Monitor Audio Group since 2019\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer's warranty: 2 years\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 4× M10 connecting bolts (tool, feet and bolt caps come with the Base Module)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat components fit on a 220 mm level?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnything up to 220 mm tall on an area of 480 × 379 mm. In practice, that's AV receivers, tube amplifiers with exposed transformers, large power supplies and turntables with a lid. Allow one to two centimetres of extra room for ventilation and connectors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I also need a Base Module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Module 220 is an extension level without feet of its own. Spikes, glides, bolt caps and the assembly and height-adjustment tool come exclusively with the Stax 2G Base Module. The module itself only includes the four M10 connecting bolts for the tier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is the component decoupled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThrough silicone isolation pads whose grooves fit over the bolt heads of the level below. On top of that, the hollow side supports can be weighted with about three litres of inert material through concealed plugs. That removes resonances from the build without making it wobbly or rattly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall can the whole rack get?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlok recommends a maximum total height of 1100 mm. With one Base Module plus three to four tiers, you stay within that range. Every level carries 40 kilograms, so the limit doesn't come from load capacity but from the tower's stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 220 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we tell you before you order which tiers your setup really needs – and which it doesn't. We know the build heights of the components we sell ourselves, deliver them, and set them up on request. Get in touch by phone, WhatsApp or email – we'll plan it out with you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe base for this is the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gbaseeschesatinweiss\"\u003eStax 2G Base Module in Ash Natural\/Satin White\u003c\/a\u003e – only there do the feet, spikes and tools come included. Further tiers in the same finish: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul120eschesatinweiss\"\u003eModule 120\u003c\/a\u003e for slim components, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul170eschesatinweiss\"\u003eModule 170\u003c\/a\u003e for amplifiers and players, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodullpeschesatinweiss\"\u003eModule LP\u003c\/a\u003e for your record collection. The whole series is under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBlok\u003c\/a\u003e, all racks under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. Matching electronics for it: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streaming\"\u003estreaming\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491675472,"sku":null,"price":350.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-220-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.jpg?v=1785443013"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodul220schwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module 220, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module 220 in Black Glass is a build-up level for the modular Stax 2G rack system with 220 mm of usable height, tempered black glass as the shelf, and gloss black side supports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt extends an existing Stax 2G upward – by exactly the tier your tallest component needs. Of the three finishes, this is the most eye-catching: glass and gloss put technology on display rather than hiding it. Don't forget the duster.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module 220?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause 170 mm eventually isn't enough. The 220 mm tier is meant for the tall calibre: AV receivers, tube amplifiers, generously sized power supplies, or a turntable complete with lid. In the Stax 2G system, you decide anew per level how much room a component gets – and you don't have to replace the whole rack when a new chassis moves in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get from it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10 mm thick black glass rests on silicone isolation pads whose grooves fit over the connecting bolts of the level below – bolted firmly in place yet acoustically separate. The hollow side supports hold about three litres and can be weighted with inert material through concealed plugs, giving the tower extra calm. By the way: the glass version offers eight millimetres more usable depth than the plywood finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module 220 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who owns or is planning a Stax 2G in Black Glass and has at least one tall component in the system. Straight talk: bought on its own, the module does you no good – feet, spikes and tools are in the Base Module. Anyone stacking only slim components is better off with 120 or 170 mm, saving build height. And anyone who can't stand fingerprints should stick with one of the two wood finishes – gloss is honest, but not forgiving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe most elegant way to add a tall level to a Stax 2G. Material quality, precision fit and decoupling are beyond doubt; the look is a matter of taste – whoever likes it gets the reference point of the series here. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we work through the tower with you in advance, including total height and flooring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build-up module for the Blok Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable height: 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (W × D): 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOuter dimensions (W × H × D): 602 × 233 × 402 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf: 10 mm black glass, tempered\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide supports: Gloss Black, hollow – fillable with inert damping material through concealed plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport fill volume: 3.0 l\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads with grooves that fit over the connecting bolts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 9.4 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended maximum stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok, Essex (UK) – part of the Monitor Audio Group since 2019\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer's warranty: 2 years\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 4× M10 connecting bolts (tool, feet and bolt caps come with the Base Module)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much space does the 220 mm level offer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e220 mm of usable height at 480 mm width and 387 mm depth. That makes the glass version eight millimetres deeper to use than the plywood versions. Add one to two centimetres of reserve for ventilation and connectors, and even an AV receiver fits with room to spare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs glass a sonic disadvantage as a shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, as long as it rests decoupled – which is exactly what happens here. The 10 mm thick tempered black glass sits on silicone isolation pads that fit over the connecting bolts. Anyone wanting even more calm can fill the hollow side supports with inert material through the concealed plugs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix glass and wood modules?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTechnically, all Stax 2G modules fit together. Visually, we'd advise against it: the glass version has gloss black supports and a slightly different usable depth than the plywood versions. Stay within one finish, and the finished tower looks like one coherent piece.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat comes with the module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour M10 connecting bolts, that's all the level needs. Feet, spikes, bolt caps as well as the assembly and height-adjustment tool belong to the Base Module. The Module 220 is an extension and only works on an existing Stax 2G build, not as a stand-alone piece of furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module 220 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we look at your rack as a whole: which level for which component, how tall the tower may become, what the floor can handle. Our team in Wädenswil has been supporting HiFi setups since the nineties and delivers with assembly on request. Call us or write to us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe foundation for any build is the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gbaseschwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eStax 2G Base Module in Black Glass\u003c\/a\u003e with feet, spikes and tools. Further tiers in the same finish: the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul120schwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eModule 120\u003c\/a\u003e for slim components, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodul170schwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eModule 170\u003c\/a\u003e for amplifiers and players, the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/blokstax2gmodullpschwarzglashgschwarz\"\u003eModule LP\u003c\/a\u003e for records. You'll find the whole series under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBlok\u003c\/a\u003e, all models under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. And what goes on top: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/cd-player\"\u003eCD players\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/streamer\"\u003estreamers \u0026amp; network players\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/zubehor\"\u003eaccessories\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491708240,"sku":null,"price":350.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-220-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785443051"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodullpescheblnussbaum","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module LP, Ash Black\/Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module LP is a build level for the modular Stax 2G rack that offers 350 mm of usable height for records standing upright. In this finish, black-stained ash sits alongside natural walnut – a material mix that carries dark electronics without the furniture itself getting loud.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module LP?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause your record collection and your system rarely end up in the same place. The Stax 2G solves that by letting you build your rack from levels: at the bottom the Base Module with height-adjustable feet, above it the module heights 120, 170 and 220 for electronics – and in between or on top, the Module LP whenever vinyl needs to join in. Every level sits on silicone isolation pads that stop structure-borne noise before it spreads. The supports are hollow and can be filled with roughly five litres of damping material each – if you want your rack calmer, there's an actual dial to turn here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get out of it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYour records stand upright, within reach and in view instead of in a box under the sofa. At the same time, the level remains a full equipment shelf: 40 kg load capacity and 350 mm clear height take even a tall tube amplifier or a turntable with the lid open. And because the system is bolted together in a stack, it grows with you – one more level instead of a whole new piece of furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module LP for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who listens to vinyl rather than just owning it, and who'd rather plan their rack than just buy one. Straight talk: the Module LP alone doesn't make a rack – without the Base Module it has no feet and no footprint. And if your collection runs into the hundreds, an LP level is a within-reach shelf, not an archive; for that you need several levels or an additional piece of furniture. If you stream exclusively, the flatter modules 120 or 170 make more sense.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe most honest level in the series: it does exactly one thing, and does it well. Ash black with walnut is the cosiest of the three finishes – warm enough for the living room, calm enough that the system keeps the lead role. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we work through the stack with you beforehand, so the heights end up matching your gear – not the other way round.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build module (record and equipment level) for the Blok Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: ash black-veneered multi-ply plywood, supports natural walnut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 12.8 mm plywood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOuter dimensions (H × W × D): 365 × 602 × 402 mm (height including mounting screws, caps and feet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (H × W × D): 350 × 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCapacity: approx. 40 records per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFillable supports: approx. 5.05 l internal volume per support, removable rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. recommended total stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 7.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), designed and developed in Rayleigh, Essex (UK)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScope of delivery: LP module (one level) with silicone isolation pads fitted, 4 × M10 mounting screws, assembly tool and instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many records fit in the Module LP?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe reckon on around 40 LPs per level. Blok doesn't give an official count, only the usable area: 350 mm height, 480 mm width and 379 mm depth. How much actually fits depends heavily on your sleeves – double albums and thick gatefolds need noticeably more space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I also need the Base Module?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for a complete rack you do. The Stax 2G Base Module brings the height-adjustable feet and the bottom level; every other module – including the LP – sits on top of it and is bolted on. You choose the order of heights freely, up to the recommended total height of 1100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I put a component on the LP level instead of records?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With 350 mm of clear height and 40 kg load capacity, the level also takes tall components that are too tight a fit on the 120, 170 or 220 modules – a tube amplifier, say, or a turntable with the lid open. Vinyl is the reason for this level, not a condition of using it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow well does the Module LP decouple?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSilicone isolation pads sit between the levels, damping structure-borne noise instead of passing it on. The supports are also hollow: remove the rubber plugs and you can fill roughly five litres each with damping material. That noticeably increases mass and rigidity, and is especially worthwhile on suspended wooden floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module LP at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we work through the stack with you before you order: which module heights your components need, where the LP level makes the most sense, and what your floor has to say about it. Our experienced team in Wädenswil supports you from planning through to setup. Call us, email us, or reach us on WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Module LP is one level among several: you'll find the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBase Module and the module heights 120, 170 and 220\u003c\/a\u003e in the Blok overview, and ready-configured setups under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. What goes on and in the levels lives under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alles-vinyl\"\u003eAll things vinyl\u003c\/a\u003e – from \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e to \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/tonabnehmer\"\u003ecartridges\u003c\/a\u003e to \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/phono-vorverstarker\"\u003ephono preamps\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491741008,"sku":null,"price":375.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-lp-esche-schwarz-nussbaum-schraegansicht.png?v=1785443068"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodullpeschesatinweiss","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module LP, Ash Natural\/Satin White","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module LP is the tall level of the modular Stax 2G rack: 350 mm of usable height, built for records standing upright. Here, natural ash meets silky-matte satin white – the lightest of the three finishes, one that tends to disappear into a bright room rather than stand out.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module LP?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith the Stax 2G, a rack isn't a single purchase decision, it's a building plan. You start with the Base Module, which provides the height-adjustable feet and the bottom level, then stack on top of it the heights your components actually need: 120 for flat gear, 170 and 220 for amplifiers and players – and the LP as soon as records want to move in too. Every level is bolted on and decoupled via silicone isolation pads that sit between the levels. The hollow supports each take roughly five litres of damping filler if you want things stiffer and calmer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get out of it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecords you can see are records you listen to more often – that's not marketing wisdom, it's everyday experience. The LP level brings your collection up to arm's reach instead of down into the cellar, and it stays sturdy while doing it: 40 kg per level is enough for a serious amount of vinyl, or for a tall component that doesn't fit under the next shelf elsewhere. Expanding later doesn't mean buying new – it means adding a level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module LP for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor vinyl listeners building their rack step by step, and for bright living spaces where dark glass would feel too heavy. Honestly: the Module LP doesn't replace record storage furniture for a large collection – it's the level for what's currently in rotation. And without the Base Module it can't stand at all; feet and footprint come from below. If you only need to house slim electronics, you're paying here for height you'll never use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe friendliest version of the LP level. Ash natural with satin white turns a piece of tech furniture into a piece of living-room furniture, without the construction suffering for it – assembly, decoupling and load capacity are identical to the dark finishes. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we look at which module heights your system needs beforehand, so you don't end up ordering twice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build module (record and equipment level) for the Blok Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: ash natural-veneered multi-ply plywood, supports satin white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 12.8 mm plywood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOuter dimensions (H × W × D): 365 × 602 × 402 mm (height including mounting screws, caps and feet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (H × W × D): 350 × 480 × 379 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCapacity: approx. 40 records per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFillable supports: approx. 5.05 l internal volume per support, removable rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. recommended total stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 7.8 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), designed and developed in Rayleigh, Essex (UK)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScope of delivery: LP module (one level) with silicone isolation pads fitted, 4 × M10 mounting screws, assembly tool and instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many LPs does the level hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a rule of thumb, we reckon on around 40 records per level. Blok doesn't give an official count, but does give the usable dimensions: 350 mm high, 480 mm wide, 379 mm deep. In the end, your sleeve thickness decides – gatefolds and box sets take up noticeably more width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Module LP be combined with the other heights?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, in any order. Base Module, Module 120, 170, 220 and LP all use the same interface and connect with M10 screws. Blok recommends a maximum total height of 1100 mm – within that limit, you decide which level goes where.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the level handle the weight of a full row of records?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It's rated for 40 kg per level, and a tightly packed row of LPs at this width doesn't come close to that on the scale. What matters more is that the stack stands properly aligned – the adjustable feet on the Base Module take care of that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow light is ash natural\/satin white, really?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's the lightest combination in the series: natural ash veneer with visible grain, paired with silky-matte white supports. Next to black electronics that gives a clear contrast; in a bright room, the furniture instead reads as almost understated. We can show you a sample on request.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module LP at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we plan your rack as a whole instead of selling individual levels: we work out which heights your components need, how much vinyl is coming along, and how the build stands on your floor. Our technician delivers and assembles on request. Get in touch by phone, email or WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe remaining building blocks of your stack – \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBase Module and the module heights 120, 170 and 220\u003c\/a\u003e – are in the Blok overview, complete rack configurations under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. For the music to go with it: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alles-vinyl\"\u003eAll things vinyl\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/phono-vorverstarker\"\u003ephono preamps\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491773776,"sku":null,"price":375.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-lp-esche-natur-satinweiss-schraegansicht.jpg?v=1785443051"},{"product_id":"blokstax2gmodullpschwarzglashgschwarz","title":"Blok Stax 2G Module LP, Black Glass","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Blok Stax 2G Module LP is the build module with the greatest clear height in the Stax 2G system: 350 mm, enough for records standing upright or for a tall component to fit. This finish uses 10 mm tempered black glass with high-gloss black supports – the most striking of the three variants, and at 11.2 kg also the heaviest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Module LP?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stax 2G isn't a finished rack, it's a building kit. The Base Module sits at the bottom with height-adjustable feet, and on top of it you stack the levels you actually need: module heights 120, 170 and 220 for electronics, the Module LP for vinyl or for tall components. Silicone isolation pads sit between the levels, damping structure-borne noise. If you want it even calmer, pull the rubber plugs out of the supports and fill them with damping material – a good five litres per support first needs to be set into motion at all.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get out of it\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlack glass turns a row of records into a display: the covers stand free, the glass surface reflects subtly, everything else steps back. It stays practical all the same – 40 kg load capacity per level and usable dimensions of 350 × 480 × 387 mm take even a tall amplifier or a turntable with the lid on. Glass is also the easiest of the three surfaces to keep clean, as long as you can live with fingerprints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Module LP for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to show off their system on purpose and keep vinyl within reach. Straight talk: glass sounds different from plywood – harder, more direct, less damping. If you're after a warm, woody voicing, the ash finishes suit you better. Otherwise the same rules apply: without the Base Module this level can't stand, and for a collection running into the hundreds, an LP level is a within-reach shelf, not an archive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe showpiece of the series – and one with real substance. More mass, more presence, the same construction and the same load capacity as the wood variants. Hand on heart: if your components are black anyway, this is the obvious choice. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil, we work through beforehand which levels your stack needs and where the LP level fits best.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Build module (record and equipment level) for the Blok Stax 2G rack system\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: tempered black glass, high-gloss black supports\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf thickness: 10 mm safety glass\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOuter dimensions (H × W × D): 363 × 602 × 402 mm (height including mounting screws, caps and feet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUsable shelf area (H × W × D): 350 × 480 × 387 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCapacity: approx. 40 records per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: 40 kg per level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling: silicone isolation pads between levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFillable supports: approx. 5.05 l internal volume per support, removable rubber plugs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. recommended total stack height: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 11.2 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer: Blok (Monitor Audio Group), designed and developed in Rayleigh, Essex (UK)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScope of delivery: LP module (one level) with silicone isolation pads fitted, 4 × M10 mounting screws, assembly tool and instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many records fit on the glass level?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe assume around 40 LPs per level. Blok doesn't publish a count, only the usable dimensions of 350 × 480 × 387 mm – the glass variant is in fact very slightly deeper usable than the wood finishes. The real number depends on your sleeves and on double albums.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the glass level heavier than the wood versions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, noticeably: 11.2 kg versus 7.5 to 7.8 kg for the plywood finishes. The extra mass works in your favour when it comes to resonance, but makes the assembly more unwieldy. It's best to plan the rack directly at its final location rather than moving it once fully built.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the black glass scratch when I put records on it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTempered glass is hard and unaffected by normal use; cardboard sleeves won't mark it. What shows up more is dust and fingerprints – a microfibre cloth is enough. Avoid sharp-edged metal parts, and place heavy components in the centre of the surface rather than on an edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix glass and wood modules?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTechnically yes: all Stax 2G modules use the same bolted connection and stack freely, up to the recommended total height of 1100 mm. Visually it's a matter of taste, and acoustically the materials behave differently. We're happy to tell you which mix actually works in practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Blok Stax 2G Module LP at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we put together the whole stack with you before anything is ordered: suitable module heights, a sensible order, room for vinyl and cables. Our experienced team by Lake Zürich has plenty of experience with racks that grow over the years. Call us, email us or reach us on WhatsApp.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe remaining levels – \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/blok\"\u003eBase Module and the module heights 120, 170 and 220\u003c\/a\u003e – are in the Blok overview, ready-built setups under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/hifi-racks\"\u003eHiFi racks\u003c\/a\u003e. To go with the LP level: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/alles-vinyl\"\u003eAll things vinyl\u003c\/a\u003e with \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/plattenspieler\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/tonabnehmer\"\u003ecartridges\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/phono-vorverstarker\"\u003ephono preamps\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLOK","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989491806544,"sku":null,"price":375.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/blok-stax-2g-modul-lp-schwarzglas-schraegansicht.png?v=1785443068"},{"product_id":"cabasseakoyastandbl","title":"Cabasse The Pearl Akoya Speaker Stand, Black (Each)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Cabasse The Pearl Akoya Speaker Stand in Black is a single stand made of aluminium and steel that brings the spherical Akoya up to 70 centimetres of listening height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCabasse didn't just source it from somewhere else – it's designed for this exact speaker: two slim, round columns on a solid steel base, finished in matte black, with all cables routed inside. One detail up front, because it regularly causes questions on our end – the stand comes as a single unit, not as a pair. For stereo, you need two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy this stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Akoya is a sphere with a coaxial driver. It sounds most balanced when its centre sits roughly at ear height and nothing in the immediate surroundings resonates along with it. A sideboard rarely delivers either: it usually sits too low and doubles as a resonating board.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis stand solves that without any tinkering. 70 centimetres of height, a round steel base 25 centimetres in diameter as a counterweight, and round rather than angular columns, on which hard reflections don't even get a chance to form. Because the columns are hollow, power cables – and Ethernet or RCA cables if needed – disappear invisibly downward. A matching power cable is included, as is the complete mounting hardware including an Allen key.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrecision-fit floor stand, exclusively for the Cabasse The Pearl Akoya\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e70 cm height – the speaker sits at roughly ear height while seated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAluminium columns on a solid steel base, matte black finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInternal cable routing through both columns\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpikes and rubber feet for parquet, tile or carpet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Akoya stand for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor you, if the Akoya should stand freely in the room and you want to sort out height, stability and cable clutter in one go. Also if your sideboard is actually too low but you'd rather not rebuild it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStraight talk: if you're hanging the Akoya on the wall anyway, the matching wall mount is more space-saving and flexible. And if you listen to two Akoya in stereo, plan for two stands right away – the box contains one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAccessory you don't need to debate for long. The stand is heavy enough to genuinely calm the Akoya, discreet enough not to draw attention in the room, and finished cleanly enough that it doesn't feel like a compromise next to a speaker of this calibre. Hand on heart: a good speaker at half height behind the fruit bowl is simply a waste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: floor stand for Cabasse The Pearl Akoya\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 piece (single stand) – the price shown is per stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight: 70 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 25 × 70 × 25 cm (round base, Ø 25 cm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 6.4 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: aluminium columns, steel base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: matte black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing: internal, through both stand columns\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFloor contact: spikes or rubber feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: exclusively for Cabasse The Pearl Akoya (speaker weight 8 kg)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScope of delivery: column, base, power cable, spikes, rubber feet, mounting screws, Allen key, tweezers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the stand come as a single unit or a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSingle unit. Cabasse sells the Akoya stand per piece – matching the fact that the speaker itself is also offered singly. If you run two Akoya in stereo, you accordingly need two stands. That way you only pay for what you actually set up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the stand also fit the larger The Pearl?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. This stand is built exclusively for the Cabasse The Pearl Akoya, and its cradle is matched to that model's sphere diameter. The Pearl has its own, larger stand. We'd advise against modifying it for other spherical speakers – standing stability isn't a detail here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I hide the cables inside the stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Both stand columns are hollow, and you route the power cable – and an Ethernet or RCA cable if needed – down through the inside. Cabasse even includes a matching power cable and a pair of tweezers for threading it. In the end, only the short stretch between base and wall socket stays visible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Akoya stand at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we tell you beforehand whether a stand or a wall mount is the better solution for your room, and how many you actually need. HD Zürisee in Wädenswil is an authorised dealer, and our technician Mauri handles delivery and assembly on request. Call us on +41 44 680 22 00, email shop@hdzuerisee.ch, or reach us on WhatsApp at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore models can be found among our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e, the matching speaker in our range of \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher\"\u003espeakers\u003c\/a\u003e, and mounts and small parts under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/zubehor\"\u003eaccessories\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Cabasse","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989493018960,"sku":null,"price":349.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/cabasse-the-pearl-akoya-lautsprecher-staender-schwarz-frontansicht.jpg?v=1785445965"},{"product_id":"cabasseakoyastandwh","title":"Cabasse The Pearl Akoya Speaker Stand, White (Each)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Cabasse The Pearl Akoya Speaker Stand in White is a 70-centimetre-tall single stand that places the spherical Akoya freely in the room at listening height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFinished in Pearl White, it recedes visually in bright rooms while the sphere on top keeps the stage. That doesn't make it lightweight construction, though: two hollow aluminium columns on a solid steel base, 6.4 kilograms together. And because Cabasse offers the Akoya piece by piece, the same goes for the stand – one box, one stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy this stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA spherical speaker reacts sensitively to what it stands on. If the Akoya sits on a shelf, every bass movement travels into the furniture front, and the sound becomes thicker than it should be. This stand's steel base absorbs that energy instead of passing it on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThen there's the height: 70 centimetres puts the sphere roughly at ear height while seated – exactly where the Akoya's coaxial driver plays to its strengths. Both stand tubes are hollow, and power, network or RCA cables run down inside. On a speaker that lives off its clean shape, that's more than cosmetics. A matching power cable is included, along with screws, an Allen key and a pair of tweezers for threading the cables.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFloor stand matched exactly to the Cabasse The Pearl Akoya\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish in Pearl White, unobtrusive in bright living rooms\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRound aluminium columns, solid steel base with a 25 cm diameter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConcealed cable routing through both columns, power cable included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInterchangeable spikes and rubber feet depending on floor covering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Akoya stand in White for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone taking a white or light-coloured Akoya to its logical conclusion, rather than balancing it on a dark base. Equally for rooms without suitable furniture at the right height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHonestly: in a room where the speaker is going on the wall anyway, the wall mount is the clearer answer. And if you listen with two Akoya, plan for two stands – this comes as one per order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand does exactly what good accessories should: it doesn't draw attention, yet handles three things at once – height, calm, cables gone. In white it practically disappears in bright rooms, which makes it the obvious choice for the white Akoya. Honestly, the speaker has earned this stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: floor stand for Cabasse The Pearl Akoya\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 piece (single stand) – the price shown is per stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight: 70 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W × H × D): 25 × 70 × 25 cm (round base, Ø 25 cm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 6.4 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: aluminium columns, steel base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Pearl White\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing: internal, through both stand columns\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFloor contact: spikes or rubber feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: exclusively for Cabasse The Pearl Akoya (speaker weight 8 kg)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScope of delivery: column, base, power cable, spikes, rubber feet, mounting screws, Allen key, tweezers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow high does the Akoya sit on this stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cradle sits at 70 centimetres, plus the sphere itself. Seated, that puts the driver centre roughly at ear height – the height Cabasse tuned the Akoya for. You typically won't reach that on a low sideboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat speakers is this stand made for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExclusively for the Cabasse The Pearl Akoya at 8 kilograms. Both the cradle and the cable routing are tailored to its spherical shape and connections. For the larger The Pearl model, Cabasse offers its own, sturdier stand. Other spherical speakers can't be mounted on it securely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I get one stand or two?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne. Cabasse supplies the Akoya stand as a single unit, not as a pair – unlike many classic bookshelf-speaker stands. If you run two Akoya in stereo, you order two stands. Just tell us how many speakers you're setting up, and we'll work it out with you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the stand stand securely on parquet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Both spikes and rubber feet are included; you choose according to your floor covering. On parquet and tile, use the rubber feet; on carpet, the spikes. At 6.4 kilograms of dead weight, the base stands calmly regardless.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Akoya stand in White at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause for over two decades we've seen which setups work in everyday life and which only look good on paper. We work through room, height and cable routing with you before you order. Get in touch on +41 44 680 22 00, on WhatsApp at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls), or at shop@hdzuerisee.ch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFind the matching speaker under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher\"\u003espeakers\u003c\/a\u003e, alternatives among the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e, and wall mounts under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/zubehor\"\u003eaccessories\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Cabasse","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989493051728,"sku":null,"price":349.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/cabasse-the-pearl-akoya-lautsprecher-staender-weiss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1785445965"},{"product_id":"cabassepearlstandbl","title":"Cabasse The Pearl Speaker Stand, Black (Each)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Cabasse The Pearl speaker stand in matte black is the purpose-built floor stand for the Cabasse The Pearl – an aluminium structure on a steel base, 84 cm tall. It raises the sound sphere exactly where it belongs, and swallows the cables along with it. That it also looks good doing what would otherwise end up as cable clutter behind the sideboard is a bonus you'll happily take.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy this stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Pearl radiates in all directions, and that's exactly why the height isn't a matter of taste. At 84 cm the coaxial system sits at ear height when you're in your armchair – the soundstage detaches from the sphere instead of sticking to the floor. The combination of aluminium structure and steel base weighs in at 15 kg and keeps the construction steady, even when the Pearl gets serious in the bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA sideboard can rarely do that. It resonates, it reflects, and it's almost never at the right height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFloor stand, built exclusively for the Cabasse The Pearl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e84 cm setup height – listening height while seated, no compromise\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAluminium structure on steel base, 15 kg own weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing hidden inside both stand tubes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecoupling spikes for carpet, soft rubber feet for hard floors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMatte black finish, matched to the Pearl in black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Pearl stand suited for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who places the Pearl freestanding in the room and takes it seriously. Bottom line: if you already have a solid piece of furniture at around 80 cm height, you can get by without it – the stand isn't a sonic miracle, it's the foundation that doesn't ruin the quality that's already there. If you'd rather mount the Pearl on the wall, or have little floor space, the wall mount suits you better. And for the smaller spheres in the family – Akoya, Myuki, Keshi – it doesn't fit: Cabasse offers its own items for those.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA stand that looks like a piece of furniture and works like a foundation. 15 kg, cable channels in both tubes, cleanly made – Cabasse hasn't cut corners on the accessories here. We at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil rarely set the Pearl up any other way, and there's a reason for that: on the right stand it comes across more assured than a 33 cm sphere would suggest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Floor stand for active speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility:\u003c\/strong\u003e exclusively for Cabasse The Pearl (not for Pearl Akoya, Myuki, Keshi or Pelegrina)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 84 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 38 × 84 × 38 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase:\u003c\/strong\u003e Steel, footprint 38 × 38 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStructure:\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium, with concealed cable routing in both stand tubes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 15 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColour:\u003c\/strong\u003e Matte black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 piece (single stand) – the price shown is per stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e stand disassembled, mounting hardware and instructions, decoupling spikes for carpet, soft rubber feet for hard floors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall is the Cabasse The Pearl stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand is 84 cm tall, and the steel base has a footprint of 38 × 38 cm. At this height, the Pearl's coaxial system plays roughly at ear level while seated, which gives the imaging noticeably more air than placing it on a low sideboard or even on the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich Cabasse models does this stand fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExclusively the Cabasse The Pearl. For the smaller Pearl Akoya, Cabasse offers its own stand at 70 cm height and 6.4 kg weight, and Myuki, Keshi and Pelegrina each have their own solutions too. The items carry separate part numbers and can't be swapped between models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I get one stand or two?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou get one stand. Cabasse sells the Pearl stand individually, not as a pair – which matches the fact that the Pearl itself is a single speaker. So if you're building a stereo pair from two Pearls, you need two stands and order this item twice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow are the cables routed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThrough the stand tubes. Both tubes have integrated cable routing, so nothing is visible from the speaker down to the floor. Since the Pearl is active and only needs power plus, optionally, a network cable, the wiring stays minimal anyway – the stand simply makes it invisible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Cabasse The Pearl stand at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we treat speaker and setup as one topic. Our team knows the Pearl from everyday use and tells you honestly whether a stand or a wall mount suits your room better. Plus delivery and on-site installation, our technician Mauri in-house, and advice by phone, WhatsApp or email.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFind the matching speaker and the whole sphere family in our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher\"\u003espeakers\u003c\/a\u003e, models for other compact speakers in our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e, and everything around setup and cabling in our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/zubehor\"\u003eaccessories\u003c\/a\u003e. Not sure between stand and wall mount? Call us on +41 44 680 22 00, WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls) or email shop@hdzuerisee.ch – tell us briefly about your room, we'll take it from there.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Cabasse","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989495017808,"sku":null,"price":449.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/cabasse-the-pearl-lautsprecher-staender-schwarz-frontansicht.jpg?v=1785445965"},{"product_id":"cabassepearlstandwh","title":"Cabasse The Pearl Speaker Stand, White (Each)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Cabasse The Pearl speaker stand in matte white is the factory-made floor stand for the Cabasse The Pearl and sets the sound sphere at 84 cm height. Aluminium structure, a steel base, 15 kg total weight – and the cables disappear inside the tube. In bright rooms, the white finish is the more discreet route: it steps back and lets the Pearl own the stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy this stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA speaker that radiates in all directions is sensitive to its surroundings. If the Pearl sits too low, too close to a surface, or on a hollow piece of furniture, it loses exactly what you bought it for: the free, cabinet-detached imaging. The 84 cm brings the coaxial system to ear height, and the 15 kg makes sure the stand doesn't resonate along with it, but instead channels energy into the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSoft rubber feet are included for hard floors, decoupling spikes for carpet. Mounting hardware and instructions are included, and the whole thing is assembled in a few minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrecisely fitted floor stand for the Cabasse The Pearl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e84 cm setup height for the listening position while seated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAluminium structure on steel base, 15 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConcealed cable routing in both stand tubes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpikes and rubber feet for carpet or parquet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMatte white finish, matched to the Pearl in white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the white stand suited for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bright living spaces, where a black stand would look out of place. Honestly, that's the main difference from the black version – technically the two are identical. It's the wrong purchase if you're planning to wall-mount the Pearl anyway, or if you already have a sturdy piece of furniture at the right height. And it doesn't fit the smaller models in the Pearl family – Akoya, Myuki and Keshi have their own stands and mounts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAccessories that are usually dismissed as an afterthought – here, it's part of the design. If you buy the Pearl and then set it on a chest of drawers, you're giving away a good part of what you chose it for. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we rarely advise against it. Unless you genuinely have the right piece of furniture already – then we'll tell you that too.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Floor stand for active speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility:\u003c\/strong\u003e exclusively for Cabasse The Pearl (not for Pearl Akoya, Myuki, Keshi or Pelegrina)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 84 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 38 × 84 × 38 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase:\u003c\/strong\u003e Steel, footprint 38 × 38 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStructure:\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium, with concealed cable routing in both stand tubes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 15 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColour:\u003c\/strong\u003e Matte white\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 piece (single stand) – the price shown is per stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e stand disassembled, mounting hardware and instructions, decoupling spikes for carpet, soft rubber feet for hard floors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Cabasse The Pearl stand made of?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAluminium and steel. The load-bearing structure with the two stand tubes is made of aluminium, and the base is steel, measuring 38 × 38 cm. Together that adds up to 15 kg of own weight – enough mass that the stand doesn't start working against the Pearl.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the stand compatible with the Pearl Akoya?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Cabasse offers a separate, smaller stand for the Pearl Akoya at 70 cm height and 6.4 kg weight. The stand offered here, at 84 cm and 15 kg, is designed for the larger The Pearl. Both items carry separate part numbers and cannot be swapped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the stand delivered individually or as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndividually. One item equals one stand, since the The Pearl itself is a single active speaker and is sold per piece. For a stereo setup with two Pearls, you simply add this item to your cart twice. The sales unit is also stated in the technical data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included in delivery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand is delivered disassembled, together with mounting hardware and instructions. It also comes with decoupling spikes for carpeted floors and soft rubber feet for hard floors like parquet or stone. The speaker itself is not included – it's sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Pearl stand at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause with us you get the whole chain, not just an accessory. Our seasoned team advises you on placement, room acoustics and cabling, and Mauri handles installation and service on site. Get in touch by phone, WhatsApp or email – we'll sort it out in five minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe matching Cabasse and the rest of the range are waiting in our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher\"\u003espeakers\u003c\/a\u003e. Looking for stands for other compact speakers? You'll find them in our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e; cables, spikes and small parts are in our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/zubehor\"\u003eaccessories\u003c\/a\u003e. Questions about placement? Phone +41 44 680 22 00, WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls) or shop@hdzuerisee.ch – tell us about your setup, and we'll help you place it.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Cabasse","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989495083344,"sku":null,"price":449.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/cabasse-the-pearl-lautsprecher-staender-weiss-frontansicht.jpg?v=1785457400"},{"product_id":"daliconnectm601","title":"DALI Connect E-601 Speaker Stands, Black (Pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe DALI Connect E-601 is a pair of speaker stands from Denmark – with an extruded aluminium column, silk-matte lacquered glass base plate and full internal cable routing, built for bookshelf and compact speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E-601 brings your bookshelf speakers up to the right height and decouples them from the floor. The glass plate at the base provides a wide, stable footprint, the aluminium column takes the cable completely out of sight, and the lacquered metal top plate carries the speaker. That way the speaker sits calmly, instead of vibrating along with a resonant sideboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Connect E-601?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause even the best bookshelf speaker doesn't achieve much sitting on a vibrating piece of furniture. A solid, decoupled stand settles the cabinet, sharpens the imaging and brings the tweeter up to ear height – the point where the soundstage and sense of space fall into place. The 30-millimetre cable ports in the base plate and column keep everything looking tidy; even a mains cable for active speakers still fits through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA pair of stands in black – high-gloss column, silk-matte glass – including adjustable spikes for carpet, rubber feet for hard floors, and adhesive and anti-slip pads for the top plate. The mounting plate measures 148 × 198 millimetres. The E-601 is designed for DALI bookshelf speakers – Spektor, Oberon, Menuet, Opticon or Rubicon – and for other compact speakers that sit securely on this surface. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we'll work out with you whether your speaker is a good match and how high it should ultimately stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Connect E-601 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLet's be clear: the E-601 is designed for compact and bookshelf speakers. The speaker isn't bolted on but placed on adhesive and anti-slip pads, and the column is designed for cable routing – DALI doesn't intend it to be filled with sand or granulate. For full-size, heavy studio monitors you're better off with a more substantial stand. And the spikes belong on carpet: on bare parquet they'll dig in mercilessly, so use the supplied rubber feet there instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA cleanly made stand with no fuss: glass at the bottom, aluminium in the middle, cable out of sight. At 3.2 kilos each it's no heavyweight – but it looks considerably better in a living room than most steel-tube alternatives and does exactly what it should with compact speakers. If you value mass above all else, go for the heavier specialist; if you want a good-looking, calm setup, you're in the right place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e speaker stand for bookshelf and compact speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the price shown applies to the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (H × W × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 602 × 260 × 320 mm with spikes (height without spikes 587 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTop plate (mounting plate):\u003c\/strong\u003e 148 × 198 mm, lacquered metal with adhesive surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBase plate:\u003c\/strong\u003e glass, silk-matte lacquered, 260 × 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColumn:\u003c\/strong\u003e extruded aluminium, high-gloss lacquered\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCable routing:\u003c\/strong\u003e internal, Ø 30 mm ports in base plate and column\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFloor coupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e height-adjustable spikes (carpet) or rubber feet (hard floors)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.2 kg per stand (pair approx. 6.4 kg)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e black (column high-gloss, glass silk-matte)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e DALI bookshelf speakers such as Spektor, Oberon, Menuet, Opticon and Rubicon\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e the speaker isn't bolted on but placed on pads; the column isn't intended to be filled with sand or granulate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's included:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 stands (2 glass base plates, 2 aluminium columns, 2 top plates, 2 mounting rods with screws), 8 spikes, 8 rubber feet, 8 anti-slip pads, 8 double-sided adhesive pads, 2 end caps, mounting instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich speakers does the Connect E-601 fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBookshelf and compact speakers. The mounting plate measures 148 × 198 millimetres, and the speaker should sit securely on it. DALI models such as Spektor, Oberon, Menuet, Opticon or Rubicon are the typical candidates. It isn't bolted on – the speaker sits on the supplied adhesive pads. It isn't designed for very large, heavy monitors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpikes or rubber feet – which do I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn carpet, use the spikes: they pierce the pile and grip the floor. On parquet or strip flooring, use the supplied rubber feet so nothing gets scratched. Both are included, and both can be finely adjusted for levelling – important so the stand doesn't wobble in the end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the speaker cable really disappear into the stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The base plate and column have 30-millimetre ports, and the cable runs from the top plate down to the floor on the inside. Even a mains cable for active speakers fits. That keeps things looking clean and keeps the cable out of reach of the vacuum cleaner and the cat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow high does the speaker sit on the E-601?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand measures 602 millimetres with spikes, 587 without. Together with a typical compact speaker, that puts the tweeter roughly at ear height when you're sitting on a normal sofa. If you sit lower or higher, that shifts – we're happy to work it out with you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I get one or two stands with the E-601?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo. The Connect E-601 is sold as a pair, and one box contains both stands plus mounting hardware – that's also how DALI's mounting instructions describe it. Included are eight spikes, eight rubber feet, and adhesive and anti-slip pads – enough for both sides. So you only need one order for both sides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the DALI Connect E-601 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the right stand turns a good speaker into a very good one – and after almost three decades in the business, we know where the difference lies. As an authorised DALI dealer we'll give you honest advice, deliver, and set it up on site if you'd like. Reach us on 044 680 22 00, WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls) or shop@hdzuerisee.ch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou'll find the matching compact speakers under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003eBookshelf speakers\u003c\/a\u003e, and the cable for the run through the column under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecherkabel\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e. More models are shown in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e overview, and you'll find the whole brand in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/dali\"\u003eDALI\u003c\/a\u003e overview.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"DALI","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989502423376,"sku":null,"price":258.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/dali-connect-e-601-lautsprecherstaender-schwarz-schraegansicht.png?v=1785848886"},{"product_id":"eposstandfuss","title":"Epos ES-14N Speaker Stand (Pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Epos stand is a speaker stand developed specifically for the Epos ES-14N stand-mount speaker, joining box and floor into one unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt brings the ES-14N up to the acoustically correct height, couples it to the floor via adjustable spikes, and bolts directly to the speaker through four pre-drilled holes. Not a nice accessory, then, but part of the tuning. Supplied as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the original stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause Karl-Heinz Fink designed it together with the ES-14N – taking a different route than half the industry. The column isn't a steel tube but a laminated wood beam made of four glued layers, joined with the same damping adhesive used in the speaker cabinet itself. The top plate consists of two steel plates with a layer of bitumen in between, the base plate of thick steel. Wood damps, steel calms, bitumen swallows the rest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA pair of stands at 515 millimetres in height – exactly the height at which the ES-14N's tweeter lands at ear level while seated and the soundstage locks in. Four aligned holes in the top plate turn speaker and stand into a mechanical unit, instead of simply sitting one on top of the other. Height-adjustable spikes sit in the steel base plate, so you can level out even an uneven old parquet floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the stand right for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStraight talk: if you own an ES-14N, this is the wrong place to save money. A sideboard reliably turns a very good monitor into a mediocre one. Third-party stands around 55 centimetres also work according to Epos, but skip the fixed bolted connection. For other stand-mount speakers, the stand is only a partial fit, since its height and bolt pattern are calculated for the ES-14N. And if you're after a sand-filled heavyweight fortress, look elsewhere: this stand works with damping, not tonnage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe most consistent foundation the ES-14N can get – and one of the few stands you can genuinely regard as part of the speaker. Set it perfectly level, lock the spikes in place, and put coasters under the tips on parquet flooring. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we'll mount the pair correctly for you on request and advise you on placement in the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the price shown applies to the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e speaker stand for Epos ES-14N, sold in pairs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColumn:\u003c\/strong\u003e laminated wood beam of four glued wood layers, same damping adhesive as in the ES-14N cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTop plate:\u003c\/strong\u003e double-layer steel with a bitumen interlayer, four aligned holes for bolting to the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase plate:\u003c\/strong\u003e thick steel, holds the adjustable spikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 515 mm (manufacturer's figure)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W×H×D):\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 33 × 51.5 × 40 cm (plate dimensions not published by the manufacturer)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e not published by the manufacturer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFloor coupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e height-adjustable spikes in the base plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFilling:\u003c\/strong\u003e not intended, the column is solid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 stands (pair), adjustable spikes, mounting hardware to connect with the speaker, self-adhesive silicone pads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Epos stand only fit the ES-14N, or other stand-mount speakers too?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's calculated for the ES-14N and only fully makes sense there. The top plate's height and bolt pattern are matched to this speaker. You can place another stand-mount speaker on it, but not bolt it on – the fixed mechanical unit of box and stand is then lost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I fill the stand with sand or shot?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, filling isn't intended. The column is a solid laminated wood beam of four glued layers rather than a hollow tube. Damping comes from the wood, the glue, and the bitumen layer in the top plate. So you won't gain extra mass here, but you will gain quiet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow high does the tweeter sit with this stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJust under a metre above the floor. The stand measures 515 millimetres, the ES-14N is 491 millimetres tall, and the tweeter sits in the upper part of the baffle. That puts it roughly at ear level while seated – exactly the height Epos chose it for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the spikes work on parquet flooring?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but please use protective discs. Spikes concentrate the entire weight onto tiny areas and would otherwise leave pressure marks on parquet or laminate. Put flat metal discs under the tips and lock the spikes firmly in place, and the floor stays intact while the coupling stays well defined.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Epos stand from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we know how much a properly mounted stand matters for the ES-14N, and we'll tell you honestly when the effort pays off. Our technician will align the pair on site for you on request. Call or write to us, and we'll sort out your room together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003eEpos ES-14N stand-mount speaker\u003c\/a\u003e, a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eintegrated amplifier\u003c\/a\u003e to go with it, and more \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"EPOS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989505700176,"sku":"303232","price":800.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/epos-es-14n-standfuss-schraegansicht.jpg?v=1785886333"},{"product_id":"focalarias900stand","title":"Focal Aria S900 Speaker Stand (Pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Focal Aria S900 is a speaker stand made of matte aluminum and tempered glass, developed specifically for the Aria EVO X N°1 (as well as the Aria 905\/906). Supplied as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 60.3 cm tall, it brings the bookshelf speaker's tweeter to ear height; the cable runs invisibly through the aluminum tube, and the speaker bolts firmly onto the satin-black mounting plate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Focal Aria S900?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a good bookshelf speaker only shows its potential on the right stand. The firm bolt-down turns speaker and stand into one mechanical unit – that settles the cabinet and tightens up the bass. The internal cable routing keeps the look clean, the tempered-glass base lowers the center of gravity and gives it a secure stance. Spikes for carpet and rubber feet for hard floors are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA stand that fits the N°1 exactly – acoustically and visually. Tweeter at ear height, stable footing, no cables in sight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Aria S900 for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStraight talk: the S900 is made for the Aria EVO X N°1 (and Aria 905\/906) and drilled precisely for it. Trying to bolt other speakers onto it just ruins the finish – a universal stand is the better choice then. And on deep-pile carpet, the included spikes belong underneath, or the whole thing wobbles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I really hide the cable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. You route it in through the bottom of the glass base into the aluminum tube and back out at the mounting plate up top – it's hard to get cleaner than that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe matching stand for the N°1 – stable, tidy, and acoustically sensible. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil we sort out placement, height, and cabling right along with it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data – Focal Aria S900\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the listed price is for the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e speaker stand (pair) for Aria EVO X N°1 \/ Aria 905 \/ 906\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60.3 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBase footprint:\u003c\/strong\u003e 27.3 × 34.5 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W×H×D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 27.3 × 60.3 × 34.5 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6.3 kg per stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTube material:\u003c\/strong\u003e matte aluminum with internal cable routing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBase material:\u003c\/strong\u003e tempered glass, gloss black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMounting plate:\u003c\/strong\u003e steel, satin black, for bolting on the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecoupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e spikes (carpet) and rubber feet (hard floors), both included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScope of delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 stands (1 pair), mounting hardware, spikes + rubber feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the S900 also fit other speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's designed and precisely drilled for the Aria EVO X N°1 as well as the Aria 905\/906. For other models we recommend a universal stand – that protects both the finish and the stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the speaker need to be bolted down?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe recommend it. Bolting couples speaker and stand firmly together, which noticeably improves stability and bass control compared with a speaker just set loosely on top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Focal Aria S900 at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we think of stand, speaker, and amplifier as one unit. We sort out placement, height, and cabling with you – personal advice and service with our own technician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003ebookshelf speaker\u003c\/a\u003e Aria EVO X N°1, a matching \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/vollverstarker\"\u003eamplifier\u003c\/a\u003e, and more \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Focal","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989506650448,"sku":null,"price":399.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/focal-aria-s900-lautsprecher-staender-paaransicht.jpg?v=1785900954"},{"product_id":"goldnotea3evo2stand","title":"Gold Note A3 EVO II Speaker Stand, Black (Pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Gold Note A3 EVO II speaker stand is the factory-matched base for the A3 EVO II bookshelf speaker — it brings the cabinet to ear height and decouples it from the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGold Note combines lacquered MDF with aluminium for this: mass against resonance, metal for stiffness. At 76 centimetres tall, the A3 EVO II's silk dome sits at ear height in a typical seated position. Sold and delivered as a pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the A3 EVO II speaker stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause a bookshelf speaker almost never belongs on a shelf. On a sideboard the cabinet couples into the furniture panel, the bass turns muddy, and the soundstage drops downward. A heavy, mechanically quiet stand solves both problems at once — and this one is tailored to the A3 EVO II's footprint and weight, rather than being an off-the-shelf compromise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat you get\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA pair of stands weighing 20 kilograms together, whose base plate at 29 × 44 centimetres is noticeably larger than the speaker's footprint — giving tip-over safety, even if someone bumps into it in passing. The height is chosen so you don't need to prop anything up or improvise. Visually, the stand in black deliberately stays in the background.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the A3 EVO II speaker stand suited for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who owns a pair of Gold Note A3 EVO II and wants to hear what's really in them. Plain talk: the stand is tailored to exactly this speaker. It's neither intended nor sized as a universal solution for any other box — if you want to put wider or deeper cabinets on it, compare the dimensions first. And if you have to build the A3 EVO II permanently into a niche anyway, you're better off skipping the stand and investing in absorbers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo accessory gimmick, but an audible part of the system. If you take the A3 EVO II seriously, you plan the stand in from the start — it's the cheapest sound upgrade you can make to this speaker at all. At HD Zürisee in Wädenswil you get speaker and base from a single source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the stated price applies to the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: dedicated speaker stand for Gold Note A3 EVO II\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: lacquered MDF and aluminium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W×H×D): 29 × 76 × 44 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 20 kg per pair (10 kg each)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFloor coupling: adjustable spikes for levelling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScope of delivery: pair (2 stands), spikes, mounting hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the stands delivered as a pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the scope of delivery includes two stands. Gold Note also states its figures per pair, such as the 20-kilogram weight for both together. A single stand, for example as an addition for a centre channel, is not part of the regular programme.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow tall is the stand, and does it suit my seating height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt measures 76 centimetres. That puts the A3 EVO II's tweeter at roughly ear height for a typical sofa or armchair seating position. If you sit noticeably lower, it helps to tilt the speakers slightly forward or adjust your listening position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the spikes scratch my parquet floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly without a pad. The spikes are meant for levelling and mechanical coupling; on sensitive floors, spike shoes or washers belong underneath them. On carpet, on the other hand, they're meant to dig in — that's exactly what they're for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the stand also fit other bookshelf speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly to a limited extent. The mounting surface is designed for the A3 EVO II's footprint. Noticeably larger or heavier cabinets no longer stand securely on it. If you have a different speaker, compare the dimensions first or just ask us — we also carry universal stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I hide the cables inside the stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Gold Note relies on solid material throughout rather than hollow tubes, because mass helps against resonance. The speaker cables therefore run along the outside of the column. A thin cable tie or clip makes this barely noticeable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the A3 EVO II speaker stand from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause we think of speaker and stand as a matched unit and give you concrete help with placement in the room — distance to the rear wall, toe-in, listening distance. Our technician Mauri sets it up on site for you on request. Get in touch with HD Zürisee in Wädenswil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand is built for the Gold Note A3 EVO II from our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003ebookshelf speakers\u003c\/a\u003e. You'll find further bases for other models under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003espeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Gold Note","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989508518224,"sku":"304494","price":990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/gold-note-a3-evo-ii-lautsprecherstaender-schwarz-paaransicht.jpg?v=1785925157"},{"product_id":"jbljs120stand","title":"JBL JS-120 Speaker Stand, Black (pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe JBL JS-120 is the matching speaker stand for the JBL L100 Classic and L100 Classic MKII – it brings the large bookshelf speaker to optimal ear height and tilts it 7° towards the listener. Sold in pairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA sturdy metal construction with a black finish, height-adjustable feet and rubberised floor feet. Also fits the older L100, L100A, L100 Century as well as 4312E\/SE\/G and 4319.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the JBL JS-120?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause a large bookshelf speaker like the L100 only shows its potential on the right stand: at ear height, slightly angled and cleanly decoupled from the floor. Placed freely on furniture, it loses openness and precise imaging.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the JS-120 for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStraight talk:\u003c\/strong\u003e The JS-120 is tailored exactly to the L100 family – it isn't meant as a universal stand for any other speaker. For the L82 or L52\/4305P, there are the matching JS-80 and JS-65.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot an accessory gimmick, but an audibly important part of the system. If you take the L100 seriously, you plan the JS-120 in right from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data – JBL JS-120\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the price shown applies to the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: speaker stand for JBL L100 Classic \/ L100 Classic MKII (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAlso compatible with: L100, L100A, L100 Century, 4312E\/SE\/G, 4319\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: metal, black finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTilt: 7° backward\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W×H×D): 322 × 236 × 362 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable, 4 rubberised floor feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 2 stands (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the JS-120 fit my L100 Classic MKII?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, the JS-120 is made exactly for the L100 Classic (MKII) and tilts it 7°. You need one stand per speaker – the JS-120 is supplied in pairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the JS-120 supplied singly or in pairs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn pairs – you receive two stands, for a complete pair of speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the JBL JS-120 at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause speakers and stands belong together. We deliver both as a matched set and set it up professionally on request. Free shipping from CHF 190.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003eJBL L100 Classic MKII\u003c\/a\u003e and good \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003espeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"JBL","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989516874064,"sku":null,"price":399.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/jbl-js-120-lautsprecherstaender-schwarz-schraegansicht.png?v=1786461196"},{"product_id":"jbljs65stand","title":"JBL JS-65 Speaker Stand, Black (pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe JBL JS-65 is the matching speaker stand for the compact JBL L52 Classic, 4305P and 4309 – it positions them at optimal listening height and aligns the drivers with your ears. Sold in pairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA metal construction with a black finish, made for small classic and studio monitor speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the JBL JS-65?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause a small speaker on a sideboard or shelf loses openness and bass control. On the JS-65, it stands stable, at ear height and decoupled from the floor – that tightens up the soundstage and settles the bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the JS-65 for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStraight talk:\u003c\/strong\u003e The JS-65 is matched to the L52, 4305P and 4309. For the larger L82, take the JS-80; for the L100, the JS-120.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe right base turns a good compact speaker into a very good one. If you take the L52 or 4305P seriously, you plan the JS-65 in right from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data – JBL JS-65\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the price shown applies to the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: speaker stand for compact bookshelf\/studio monitors (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for: JBL L52 Classic, 4305P, 4309\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: metal, black finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W×H×D): 330 × 673 × 360 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad capacity: up to 11 kg per stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: 4 height-adjustable feet with rubber tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 2 stands (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the JS-65 supplied singly or in pairs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn pairs – you receive two stands, for a complete pair of speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the JS-65 fit my L52 or 4305P?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, the JS-65 is matched to the L52 Classic, 4305P and 4309 and brings them to ear height. It supports speakers up to 11 kg per stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the JBL JS-65 at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause speakers and stands belong together. We deliver both as a matched set and set it up professionally on request. Free shipping from CHF 190.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003eJBL L52 Classic\u003c\/a\u003e and the active \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003eJBL 4305P\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"JBL","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989516906832,"sku":null,"price":399.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/jbl-js-65-lautsprecherstaender-schwarz-schraegansicht.jpg?v=1786461194"},{"product_id":"jbljs80stand","title":"JBL JS-80 Speaker Stand, Black (pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe JBL JS-80 is the matching speaker stand for the JBL L82 Classic (and 4329P) – it brings the bookshelf speaker to optimal listening height and tilts it 7° backward for the best dispersion. Sold in pairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA sturdy construction with rubber feet, matched exactly to the cabinet width and weight of the L82.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the JBL JS-80?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause the L82 plays more openly and with better control on the right stand: at ear height, slightly angled and cleanly decoupled from the floor. The 7° tilt optimally aims the drivers at the listening position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the JS-80 for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStraight talk:\u003c\/strong\u003e The JS-80 is tailored to the L82 Classic and 4329P. For the L52\/4305P, take the JS-65; for the large L100, the JS-120.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe matching base for the L82 – stable, just the right height and sensibly angled. An audibly important part of the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data – JBL JS-80\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the price shown applies to the pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: speaker stand for JBL L82 Classic \/ 4329P (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (W×H×D): 330 × 462 × 360 mm (base width 254 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTilt: 7° backward\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: metal with rubber feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeet: height-adjustable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded: 2 stands (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the JS-80 fit my L82 Classic MKII?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, the JS-80 is made exactly for the L82 Classic (and the 4329P) and tilts it 7°. You need one stand per speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the JS-80 supplied singly or in pairs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn pairs – you get two stands, for a complete pair of speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the JBL JS-80 at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause speakers and stands belong together. We deliver both as a matched set and set it up professionally on request. Free shipping from CHF 190.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/regallautsprecher\"\u003eJBL L82 Classic MKII\u003c\/a\u003e and good \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/kabel\"\u003espeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"JBL","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989516939600,"sku":null,"price":299.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/jbl-js-80-lautsprecherstaender-schwarz-frontansicht.png?v=1786461195"},{"product_id":"loewefloorstandmotorstellar4255","title":"Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 42-55, alu silver","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 42-55 is a motorised floor stand for the Loewe Stellar TVs in 42, 48 and 55 inches – it places the TV freely in the room and rotates it electrically by up to ±45° via remote control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot just a simple post, but a piece of Loewe mechanics: a whisper-quiet motor, a programmable home position and internal cable routing that preserves your Stellar's clean look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Floor Stand Motor 42-55?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause you change the viewing angle at the touch of a button instead of getting up. The motor smoothly swivels the TV out of the glass front's light cone, automatically returns to the rest position when switched off, and keeps everything tidy thanks to concealed cable routing. Power and control run through the TV's system connector – one less cable in the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Floor Stand Motor 42-55 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to place their Stellar 42, 48 or 55 freely in the room as a design object. In plain terms: it's built exclusively for these three Stellar sizes – the mount doesn't fit larger panels or other brands. And if you like to yank the TV around by hand, you'll damage the gearing over time; the motor wants to be moved gently via remote control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the motor need its own power outlet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Power supply and control run entirely through your Stellar's system connector. The TV automatically detects the floor stand and unlocks the rotation options in the menu.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Motor from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we don't just sell Loewe, we deliver, install and set it up – as an authorised Loewe specialist retailer in Wädenswil. We assemble the floor stand properly and set up the rotation function. Including 5 years of on-site warranty, backed by our own technician Mauri.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Floor Stand Motor 42-55 is pure everyday luxury for open living spaces: quiet, precise and fully integrated into the Stellar. Honestly – once you've rotated it at the touch of a button, you'll never want to get up again.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: motorised floor stand (Floor Stand)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: aluminium \/ stainless steel, solid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: alu silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation range: ±45° (electrically controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl: via the Loewe remote control \/ TV menu\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing: concealed internally\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: TV system connector (no separate power outlet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Loewe Stellar 42, Stellar 48, Stellar 55\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: approx. 18 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarranty: incl. 5 years on-site warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotorised floor plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStand tube with internal cable routing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStellar TV mount\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl \u0026 connection cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich Loewe TVs does the Floor Stand Motor Stellar 42-55 fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt fits the Loewe Stellar models in 42, 48 and 55 inches. The mount is designed precisely for these three sizes; other Stellar diagonals or TVs from other brands cannot be mounted. If you're not sure which variant you have, just tell us your model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the floor stand motorised, and how do I control the rotation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, the stand rotates electrically by up to ±45°. It's controlled via the Loewe remote control or the TV menu, you don't need an extra box or app. Power and control signal run through the TV's system connector, so a separate power outlet for the floor stand isn't needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need tools or a second person to assemble it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMounting material and the user manual are included, but tools aren't. Because of the roughly 18 kilograms of dead weight and the sensitive panel, we recommend working in pairs. It's most relaxed if we deliver and assemble it: we align the stand and set up the rotation function at the same time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow are the cables routed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cables disappear internally inside the stand tube and stay hidden from view. The control and connection cable to the TV's system connector is included. All that remains visible in the end is whatever you connect additionally, such as power or HDMI cables from external devices. So plan cable lengths generously.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 42-55 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we're an authorised Loewe specialist retailer and we don't just put the floor stand down in its box. We deliver, install, set up the rotation function and handle everything in the event of a warranty claim, with our own technician Mauri. Call or write to us, and we'll clarify beforehand whether your Stellar fits.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Loewe","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989536698704,"sku":null,"price":1099.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/loewe-floor-stand-motor-stellar-42-55-alu-silver-tv-staender-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786470219"},{"product_id":"loewefloorstandmotorstellar65","title":"Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 65, alu silver","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 65 is a motorised floor stand for the Loewe Stellar TV in 65 inches – it places the TV freely in the room and rotates it electrically by up to ±45° via remote control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot just a simple post, but a piece of Loewe mechanics: a whisper-quiet motor, a programmable home position and internal cable routing that preserves your Stellar's clean look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Floor Stand Motor 65?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause you change the viewing angle at the touch of a button instead of getting up. The motor smoothly swivels the 65-incher out of the glass front's light cone, automatically returns to the rest position when switched off, and keeps everything tidy thanks to concealed cable routing. Power and control run through the TV's system connector – one less cable in the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Floor Stand Motor 65 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to place their Stellar 65 freely in the room as a design object. In plain terms: it's built exclusively for the Stellar 65 – the mounting pattern doesn't fit other sizes or other brands. And if you like to yank the TV around by hand, you'll damage the gearing over time; the motor wants to be moved gently via remote control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the motor need its own power outlet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Power supply and control run entirely through your Stellar 65's system connector. The TV automatically detects the floor stand and unlocks the rotation options in the menu.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Motor from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we don't just sell Loewe, we deliver, install and set it up – as an authorised Loewe specialist retailer in Wädenswil. We assemble the floor stand properly and set up the rotation function. Including 5 years of on-site warranty, backed by our own technician Mauri.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Floor Stand Motor 65 is pure everyday luxury for open living spaces: quiet, precise and fully integrated into the Stellar. Honestly – once you've rotated it at the touch of a button, you'll never want to get up again.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: motorised floor stand (Floor Stand)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: aluminium \/ stainless steel, solid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: alu silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation range: ±45° (electrically controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl: via the Loewe remote control \/ TV menu\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing: concealed internally\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: TV system connector (no separate power outlet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Loewe Stellar 65\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: approx. 19.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarranty: incl. 5 years on-site warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotorised floor plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStand tube with internal cable routing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStellar 65 TV mount\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl \u0026 connection cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Floor Stand Motor Stellar 65 only fit the 65-inch model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The floor stand is built exclusively for the Loewe Stellar in 65 inches; the mounting pattern doesn't fit the smaller Stellar models or TVs from other manufacturers. There are separate variants of the series for 42, 48 and 55 inches, as well as for 77 and 83 inches.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I rotate the TV on the floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBy remote control. The motor electrically swivels the Stellar 65 by up to ±45°, operated directly in the TV menu. A home position can be programmed, so the TV automatically returns to the rest position when switched off. You shouldn't help it along by hand, as that puts strain on the gearing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I assemble the floor stand on my own?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBetter with two people. The stand weighs around 19.5 kilograms, plus the weight of the 65-inch panel, which needs to be guided securely when hanging it. Mounting material and instructions are included, tools aren't. If you'd like, we take care of delivery, assembly and setting up the rotation function completely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan you see the cables on the floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo, they run concealed inside the stand tube. The supplied control and connection cable links the stand to the TV's system connector, so a separate power outlet isn't needed. You'll need to wire any additional sources like a player or console separately, so it's worth planning a bit ahead.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 65 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause with us you don't just get a part, you get a fully set-up solution. As an authorised Loewe specialist retailer in Wädenswil, we deliver, assemble and set the rotation positions to suit your room. If you have questions, you can reach us by phone, WhatsApp or email, even after your purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Loewe","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989536731472,"sku":null,"price":1099.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/loewe-floor-stand-motor-stellar-65-alu-silver-tv-staender-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786470220"},{"product_id":"loewefloorstandmotorstellar7783","title":"Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 77-83, alu silver","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 77-83 is a solid, motorised floor stand for the Loewe Stellar giants in 77 and 83 inches – it places the TV freely in the room and rotates it electrically by up to ±45° via remote control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot just a simple post, but a piece of Loewe mechanics with plenty of torque: a powerful, whisper-quiet motor, a programmable home position and internal cable routing that preserves your Stellar's clean look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Floor Stand Motor 77-83?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause you swivel even the heaviest panels in the series at the touch of a button instead of laboriously pushing them around. The motor handles the mass in a controlled way, automatically returns to the rest position when switched off, and keeps everything tidy thanks to concealed cable routing. Power and control run through the TV's system connector – one less cable in the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Floor Stand Motor 77-83 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to stage their Stellar 77 or 83 freely in the room as a sculptural element. In plain terms: it's built exclusively for these two Stellar sizes – other brands are absolutely off-limits. And the motor deliberately works with care, so the inertia of the large panels doesn't tear at the mechanics; helping it along by hand damages the gearing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the motor need its own power outlet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Power supply and control run entirely through your Stellar's system connector. The TV automatically detects the floor stand and unlocks the rotation options in the menu. Tip: before the first swivel, check that the radius is really clear – the 83-incher has an enormous span.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Motor from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we don't just sell Loewe, we deliver, install and set it up – as an authorised Loewe specialist retailer in Wädenswil. We assemble the floor stand properly and set up the rotation function. Including 5 years of on-site warranty, backed by our own technician Mauri.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Floor Stand Motor 77-83 moves even the largest Stellar panels effortlessly and quietly. Honestly – cinema format that adjusts to you at the touch of a button.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: motorised floor stand (Floor Stand)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: aluminium \/ stainless steel, solid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: alu silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation range: ±45° (electrically controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl: via the Loewe remote control \/ TV menu\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing: concealed internally\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: TV system connector (no separate power outlet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Loewe Stellar 77, Stellar 83\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: approx. 22 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarranty: incl. 5 years on-site warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotorised floor plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStand tube with internal cable routing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTV mount for Stellar 77 \/ 83\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl \u0026 connection cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting material\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich Loewe TVs is the Floor Stand Motor Stellar 77-83 made for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor the Loewe Stellar in 77 and 83 inches. The TV mount is precisely matched to these two diagonals; smaller Stellar models and devices from other brands cannot be securely attached. For 42 to 55 inches and for 65 inches, Loewe offers its own versions of the motorised floor stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does the motor rotate and how is it operated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stand rotates electrically by up to ±45°, controlled via the Loewe remote control and the TV menu. A home position is programmable; the TV automatically parks there when switched off. Check the radius before the first swivel: an 83-inch panel needs noticeably more clearance to the side than you'd expect at first glance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow involved is the assembly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNothing happens here without a second person. The floor stand weighs around 22 kilograms, and the 77- or 83-inch panel is large and unwieldy. Mounting material and instructions are included, tools aren't. On request, we deliver and assemble everything completely, including alignment and setting up the rotation function.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere do the cables go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eInto the stand tube. The cable routing runs internally and stays invisible from outside; the supplied control and connection cable goes to the TV's system connector. Because the TV rotates, you should leave enough slack in any additional cables so nothing pulls or chafes while swivelling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Motor Stellar 77-83 from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause a panel this size deserves to be professionally mounted, and that's exactly what we take care of. As an authorised Loewe specialist retailer, we deliver, assemble, set up the rotation function and handle the warranty, with our technician Mauri remaining your point of contact. Tell us a bit about your room and we'll clarify the space requirements in advance.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Loewe","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989536764240,"sku":null,"price":1299.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/loewe-floor-stand-motor-stellar-77-83-alu-silver-tv-staender-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786470220"},{"product_id":"loewefloorstandslex","title":"Loewe Floor Stand Flex, basalt grey","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Loewe Floor Stand Flex in basalt grey is a free-standing floor stand with a backward-sloping design for the Loewe Stellar TVs from 42 to 77 inches – manually rotatable by ±45° and including mounts for a soundbar and an accessory shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot a bulky post, but a sculptural statement: the angled shaft looks visually light yet stays rock solid, and internal cable routing preserves your Stellar's clean look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Floor Stand Flex?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it doesn't just slap your Stellar flat against the wall, but places it in the room as a design object. The rotating floor plate manually swivels the TV into the ideal viewing axis, the soundbar or shelf turn along with it thanks to synchronised rotation, and all the cables disappear inside the angled stand tube. Both mounts for soundbar and accessories are already included – no annoying reordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Floor Stand Flex suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants to stage their Stellar (42 to 77 inches) freely as a sculptural element or room divider. In plain terms: it's a solid piece with substantial dead weight – not meant for rearranging the whole flat every two weeks. And it's built exclusively for the Stellar series; a TV from another brand doesn't fit the proprietary mounting system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes my Stellar 77 sit securely on the Flex?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The base plate is balanced so that the centre of gravity stays safely over the plate even at 45° rotation – we tested this in our shop with the Stellar 77 DR+. Nothing tips over, even if things get a bit lively in the living room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Flex from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we don't just sell Loewe, we deliver, install and set it up – as an authorised Loewe specialist retailer in Wädenswil. We assemble the floor stand properly and mount the TV and soundbar securely. Including 5 years of on-site warranty, backed by our own technician Mauri.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Floor Stand Flex is the clever all-in-one station for modern floor plans: dynamic looks, secure stability and soundbar mounts included. Honestly – a stand that looks as good as the TV sitting on it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: free-standing floor stand (Floor Stand), angled design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: high-quality steel \/ aluminium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColour: basalt grey\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation range: ±45° (manual)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCable routing: concealed internally\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAccessories: incl. 2 mounts (shelf \/ soundbar)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlacement: free-standing on the floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Loewe Stellar 42 to 77 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: substantial dead weight for a secure, tip-free stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarranty: incl. 5 years on-site warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAngled stand tube with cable routing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotating floor plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2x mounts (accessory shelf \u0026 soundbar mounting)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting material for the Stellar series\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich Loewe TVs does the Floor Stand Flex fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Flex is built for the Loewe Stellar series from 42 to 77 inches. Within that range it covers all common diagonals, but the mounting system is proprietary: a TV from another brand cannot be mounted. Tell us your Stellar model and we'll confirm the fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Floor Stand Flex motorised, or do I rotate it by hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBy hand. The floor plate can be manually swivelled by ±45°; the Flex has no motor and therefore no remote-control operation. However, the soundbar and accessory shelf rotate along thanks to synchronised rotation, so picture and sound stay on one axis. If you want electric swivelling, go for the motorised variants in the series.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need tools or help setting it up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMounting material for the Stellar series and the user manual are included, tools aren't. Because the Flex is deliberately built heavy so it stands tip-free, you should set it up with two people and hang the TV together. On request, we deliver, assemble and mount the TV and soundbar securely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the Flex handle cable routing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cables run internally inside the angled stand tube and stay hidden from outside. This also applies to the connection to the soundbar when it sits on the supplied mount. Because the plate rotates, it's best to plan a bit of slack in power and signal cables so nothing pulls while swivelling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Floor Stand Flex from HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we're an authorised Loewe specialist retailer and we don't just sell the Flex, we deliver, assemble it and mount the TV and soundbar securely. On top of that comes years of experience with Stellar installations in real living spaces and our own technician for service and warranty. Call or write to us, we're happy to advise you.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Loewe","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989536797008,"sku":null,"price":780.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/loewe-floor-stand-flex-basalt-grey-tv-staender-seitenansicht.jpg?v=1786470220"},{"product_id":"loewetablestandmotorstellar7783","title":"Loewe Table Stand Motor Stellar 77-83, alu silver","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Loewe Table Stand Motor Stellar 77-83 is a solid, motorised table stand for the Loewe Stellar giants in 77 and 83 inches – it holds the TV securely on your sideboard and swivels it electrically via remote control by up to ±20° into the ideal viewing axis.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot a wobbly stand, but Loewe mechanics with real power: controlled torque for the heaviest panels in the range, operated directly via the TV menu, with no extra box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Table Stand Motor 77-83?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause you align your Stellar giant to face you without touching it, instead of pushing the heavy panel by hand. The motor handles the mass effortlessly and without overshoot, lets you save fixed positions for switching on and off, and runs entirely via the TV's system connector – one less cable in the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Table Stand Motor 77-83 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor anyone who wants their Stellar 77 or 83 to sit proudly on a sideboard and control the viewing angle electrically. Plain talk: the ±20° swivel range needs a good amount of depth for the 83-inch model – in a tight wall unit, the edge will otherwise hit the back wall. And the motor doesn't like being helped along by hand; this is precision for connoisseurs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I save fixed angles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. In the menu you set which position the TV moves to on power-on and where it parks on power-off – handy when your dining table and sofa sit at an angle to each other. Power and control run via the system connector, so you don't need a separate power outlet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Table Stand Motor at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we don't just sell Loewe – we deliver, install, and set it up, as an authorised Loewe dealer in Wädenswil. We mount the heavy Stellar securely on the table stand and set up the swivel function. Including a 5-year on-site warranty, backed by our own technician Mauri.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Table Stand Motor 77-83 brings cinema format to your sideboard and points it at you at the push of a button – powerful, quiet, fully integrated. Honestly – laziness at its finest.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: motorised table stand (Table Stand)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: solid metal \/ aluminium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: alu silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwivel range: ±20° (motorised)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eControl: via the Loewe system remote control \/ TV menu\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePositions: storable on\/off position\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: system cable to the TV (no separate power outlet)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility: Loewe Stellar 77, Stellar 83\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: approx. 8 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWarranty: incl. 5-year on-site warranty\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotorised base plate (Table Stand)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTV mounting console\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSystem connection cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting screws\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich Loewe TVs does the Table Stand Motor Stellar 77-83 fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Loewe Stellar in 77 and 83 inches. The mounting console is designed for these two screen sizes; other Stellar sizes or other brands don't fit. The stand is meant for placement on a sideboard or lowboard that can safely bear the panel's weight and depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does the Table Stand swivel and how do I control it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table stand swivels electrically by up to ±20°, operated via the Loewe system remote control or the TV menu. On and off positions can be saved, so the TV automatically moves into the desired viewing axis. You shouldn't push it by hand, as that puts strain on the mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much space and how many hands does the installation need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFitting and screwing on the TV takes two people. The stand itself weighs only around 8 kilograms, but the 77- or 83-inch panel is large and heavy. Mounting screws and instructions are included, tools are not. It's also important to have enough depth behind the TV, otherwise the edge will hit something when swivelling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the Table Stand wired?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVia the included system connection cable to the TV. Power and control come through this from the TV, so you don't need a separate power outlet for the stand. Since the TV swivels, it's best to route any additional cables with a bit of slack behind the sideboard so nothing gets pulled taut when turning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Loewe Table Stand Motor Stellar 77-83 at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause as an authorised Loewe dealer, we securely mount the heavy Stellar on the table stand and set up the swivel function right away. We check beforehand with you whether your sideboard has the depth and load capacity, and stay your contact in Wädenswil even after purchase, with our technician Mauri.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Loewe","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989540237648,"sku":null,"price":1299.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/loewe-table-stand-motor-stellar-77-83-alu-silver-tischstaender-frontansicht.jpg?v=1786470221"},{"product_id":"moonvoicestand","title":"MOON Stand 22 Speaker Stands for Voice 22 (Pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe MOON Stand 22 is a low-resonance speaker stand developed exclusively for the MOON Voice 22 – it brings the speaker to optimal listening height and cleanly decouples it from the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the MOON Stand 22?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause even the best bookshelf speaker only plays as well as the base it stands on. The Stand 22 is precisely tailored to the shape and mounting points of the Voice 22, turning speaker and stand into a rigid unit. The column can be filled with sand or fine granulate: more mass, less self-resonance, a calmer stance. Spikes cleanly decouple the whole thing from the floor on carpet; rubber feet are included for hard or sensitive floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat it delivers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn the right stand, the Voice 22's sound noticeably tightens up: the bass becomes firmer and drier, the soundstage moves up to ear height and the imaging gains focus. Vibrations that would otherwise travel back into the cabinet via a wobbly shelf or a sideboard largely disappear. In short: the same speaker, audibly more composed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stand 22 for – and who isn't it for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA must-buy for anyone placing their Voice 22 freely in the room and wanting to extract the last ounce of precision. Since it's made to fit the Voice 22 exactly, the speaker sits firmly and securely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStraight talk: the Stand 22 isn't intended for other speakers – its mounting and dimensions are tailored to the Voice 22. And if you're placing your speakers in a shelf or on the wall anyway, you don't need it. Standing freely in the room is where it earns its keep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot an accessory gimmick, but the most acoustically sensible companion to the Voice 22: stable, fillable and cleanly built. If you're taking the Voice 22 seriously, factor in the matching stand from the start. We at HD Zürisee in Wädenswil are happy to show you what it draws out of your speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the stated price is per pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e dedicated speaker stand, sold in pairs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility:\u003c\/strong\u003e exclusively for MOON Voice 22\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e steel, column fillable with sand; top plate with damping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sandtex coating, Black\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFloor coupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e spikes (for carpet) and rubber feet (for hard floors)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 23 × 60 × 28 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 15 kg per pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded in delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands), spikes and rubber feet, mounting hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich speakers is the MOON Stand 22 made for?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eExclusively for the MOON Voice 22. Shape, mounting and height are precisely matched to this speaker so that speaker and stand form a firm, low-resonance unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShould I fill the stand?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, it's worthwhile. Filled with sand or fine granulate, the stand gains mass and calm. That settles the whole setup and makes the bass audibly tighter and more precise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the Stand 22 supplied singly or in pairs?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIn pairs. You receive two stands – matching the Voice 22 pair – including spikes and rubber feet for floor decoupling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy buy the MOON Stand 22 at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause placement is the underrated part of good reproduction. We set up the Voice 22 with the Stand 22 correctly in your room, advise on filling and positioning, and are there for you as an authorised MOON dealer in Wädenswil – with our own technician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGoes well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand belongs under the MOON Voice 22 from the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/moon\"\u003eMOON Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. More speakers are shown under \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"MOON","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989541974352,"sku":null,"price":480.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/moon-stand-22-lautsprecher-staender-fuer-voice-22-seitenansicht.jpg?v=1786531858"},{"product_id":"raidhotd1-2standbl","title":"Raidho TD1.2 Speaker Stands, Black High Gloss (Pair)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Raidho TD1.2 speaker stand is the dedicated stand pair for the Raidho TD1.2 compact speaker – handmade in Denmark, with ceramic ball decoupling and height-adjustable feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA compact speaker in this class is only as good as what it stands on. That's exactly what this stand is for: not a universal model, but part of the TD1.2 concept.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the dedicated TD1.2 stand?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRaidho designed this stand specifically for the TD1.2. Its 78 cm height brings the ribbon tweeter to ear level, the ceramic ball system decouples the speaker from the stand at four points, and the height-adjustable feet compensate for uneven floors. That keeps the speaker rock-steady – and you can hear it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it delivers\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA stable, decoupled stand means fewer resonances, tighter imaging and more defined bass. At ear level the dispersion axis is correct, and the soundstage becomes more tangible. The difference between \"just any stand\" and the dedicated one is exactly what you shouldn't give away with a speaker in this class.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TD1.2 stand for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor anyone running a TD1.2 (or TD1.2 Signature) seriously. \u003cstrong\u003eBottom line:\u003c\/strong\u003e a must, not a nice-to-have – a wobbly or too-low stand turns the best compact speaker into a mediocre one. You get it straight as a pair – matching your two TD1.2s.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOur verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith the TD1.2, the dedicated stand isn't an accessory – it's part of the speaker. It's supplied exclusively as a pair, so both speakers are automatically complete.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dedicated speaker stand for Raidho TD1.2 (incl. Signature), sold as a pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 78 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × H × D):\u003c\/strong\u003e 320 × 780 × 420 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 kg per stand (9.6 kg per pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDecoupling:\u003c\/strong\u003e ceramic ball system at four points\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeet:\u003c\/strong\u003e height-adjustable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMade in:\u003c\/strong\u003e handmade in Denmark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFinishes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Black High Gloss or Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSales unit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 pair (2 stands) – the price shown is per pair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Raidho TD1.2 speaker stands (1 pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the price per stand or per pair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe price is per pair (2 stands) – matching a TD1.2 pair. We don't offer single stands separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the stand also fit the TD1.2 Signature?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The TD1.2 Signature uses the same cabinet as the standard TD1.2 – the stand fits both versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need one or two stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou always receive both stands as a pair, matching a TD1.2 pair. We don't sell single stands separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy not just use a universal stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eHeight, footprint and the ceramic ball decoupling are all tuned to the TD1.2. Any random stand might match that – usually it doesn't, and then you give away imaging and bass definition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy buy the Raidho TD1.2 stand at HD Zürisee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we carry Raidho and know how the TD1.2, its stand and placement work together. We'll advise you on height, positioning and decoupling, and deliver straight to you on request. Call us at 044 680 22 00 or message us on WhatsApp \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/wa.me\/41765342200\"\u003e076 534 22 00\u003c\/a\u003e (text only, no calls).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePairs well with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis stand belongs under the Raidho TD1.2 (also available as Signature) – you'll find it in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/raidho\"\u003eRaidho range\u003c\/a\u003e. More matching stands are shown in the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/lautsprecher-staender\"\u003eSpeaker Stands\u003c\/a\u003e category.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Raidho","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52989552787792,"sku":null,"price":5396.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0932\/3262\/8048\/files\/raidho-td1-2-lautsprecherstaender-frontansicht-schwarz-hochglanz.png?v=1786616562"}],"url":"https:\/\/hdzuerisee.ch\/en\/collections\/hifi-mobel.oembed","provider":"HD Zürisee AG","version":"1.0","type":"link"}